<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=FuzzyBot</id>
	<title>Ianseo - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=FuzzyBot"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/FuzzyBot"/>
	<updated>2026-08-07T09:31:02Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.7</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Team_Events_Setup/en&amp;diff=4561</id>
		<title>Competition/Team Events Setup/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Team_Events_Setup/en&amp;diff=4561"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:27:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=This is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set up&#039;&#039;&#039; page. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Team Finals]]&#039;&#039;&#039; to go to the Management pages}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Planning Team Finals reduces the possibility of making errors and increase the ease of results management, especially if the ISK-NG is planned to be used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage Events==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Team-Main.png|thumb|Team Events List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Team Events Setup =&amp;gt; Manage Events&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; shows the list of team events.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Event Code&#039;&#039;&#039;: Code of the event. This is the code that will be used throughout ianseo. It changes into a &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;button&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; when saved in order to change which categories and eventually subclasses are eligible to shoot in this event (see [[#Event Category Selection]])&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Event Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: description of the event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: check to enable as para event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;: order by which the event will be listed&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Eliminations&#039;&#039;&#039;: type of elimination. See [[#Elimination Types]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Match Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039;: select the scoring format (cumulative or set system) for the event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;First Phase&#039;&#039;&#039;: select the first phase for the brackets part of this event. Please check with [[Participants#Statistics]] to set the correct starting phase based on the actual participant numbers. Select &amp;quot;--&amp;quot; (no starting phase) to create events without brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: select the correct target type for this event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ø (cm)&#039;&#039;&#039;: diameter (in cm) of the target&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Distance&#039;&#039;&#039;: Shooting distance. Can be 0 for events where the distance varies between phases or ends.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Create and Delete Events based on Participants&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button will create or delete events based on the categories not set as part of an event or delete events where no eligible archers are present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Event Category Selection===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Code.png|thumb|Category Selection]]&lt;br /&gt;
Category and eventual subclass eligibility is defined in this page. Select which categories are eligible. Multiple selections are made with CTRL+Click. Default is no subclass filter, it must be enabled manually to be used.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Code-Advanced.png|thumb|Category Selection, Advanced]]&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Advanced&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button opens some extended fields. These values are critical for the correct behaviour of the event results:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Number of Athletes/Teams to Select&#039;&#039;&#039;: automatically calculated based on the starting phase, can be changed to reduce the selection only: top ranked archers will have a bye&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Rank of First Athlete/Team to Select&#039;&#039;&#039;: usually &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; for regular brackets, can be set to another value, for example to manage secondary competitions with lower ranked archers&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Is a Medal Event&#039;&#039;&#039;: selects if the event will be awarded&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Event&#039;s Winner Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;: set this to the first ranked after the event is finished. Should be the same as &#039;&#039;Rank of first athlete&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Event Code&#039;&#039;&#039;: If this event is a child of another event, then leave the category selection above empty as the opponents will be the dropout/winner of the parent event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Winners of Parent Event&#039;&#039;&#039;: if &#039;&#039;Parent Event Code&#039;&#039; is selected, defines if the event will be populated by the dropouts (default) or the winners of previous events&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: Label to set for the first level tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;XNine Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: Label to set for the second level tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as Gold&#039;&#039;&#039;: Points to be retained to calculate the first level tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as XNine&#039;&#039;&#039;: Points to be retained to calculate the second level tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Golds in Ties&#039;&#039;&#039;: Establishes if ties should be break based on the first tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Check XNine in Ties&#039;&#039;&#039;: Establishes if ties should be break based on the second tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ranking AFTER following distance&#039;&#039;&#039;: Usually set as &amp;quot;last&amp;quot;, can be changed to accommodate specific needs of the competition format&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum Team Components&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum numbero of athletes in the team.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WA Category&#039;&#039;&#039;: Equivalence between this event and the WA category if any&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Elimination Types===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Elimination-Type.png|thumb|Elimination Types]]&lt;br /&gt;
Defaults to &amp;quot;Regular brackets&amp;quot;, but can be changed to other types of elimination.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=error|text=Changing this value will litterally kill the previous elimination type references and matches and recreate the all items needed to manage results for this new type.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Round Robin====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Team-Elimination-RR.png|thumb|Round Robin Event Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
Round Robin global setup for this event only need to set how many &amp;quot;waves&amp;quot; of Round Robin matches will be held until placing teams in the final brackets (if any).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Levels&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of Round Robin levels will be held (see [[Round Robin]] for the complete setup)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Archers on Targets==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Opponents.png|thumb|Target and Phase Opponents Setup]]This page shows a comprehensive table of how many Teams per target are set for all the phases of the event. It usually defaults to 1 team per target. It also establishes if matches will be shot in a single wave or in two waves.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=A selector enables an easy switch between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Individual&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Team&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; setup, as well as switch between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Opponents per Target&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Manage Phase&#039;s Arrows per Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Arrows per Set==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Arrows.png|thumb|Arrows and Ends Setup]]Fields need to be checked, especially when creating new events. Each event has 2 lines, one for &amp;quot;Elimination&amp;quot; phases (up to 1/8 included) and one for &amp;quot;Finals&amp;quot; phases (1/4, 1/2, Medals) as ends and arrows per end might change between the 2. Blue and Green dots will show how the phases will be shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Targets Number==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Targets.png|thumb|Target Assignment for Grids]]First select the event to work on. A grid will appear based on the selections set in [[#Archers on Targets]]: One field for both opponents if 2 teams per target (they will be assigned as 1A and 1B), one field per opponent if one team per target. There are some shortcuts to ease the target assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
This setup is mandatory in case of:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG]] is planned for electronic scoring&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|Field of Play]] printout for field management&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Team Finals#Score|Athletes Sheets]] with assigned target box in case of win&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduling==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Schedule.png|thumb|Match Scheduling]]As before, first select the event to work on. A grid will appear where information can be inserted for every match or globally for a whole phase. Each Phase has at the top the fields to insert a date (format day-month-year), a time and an optional duration of the match. Once set, clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;Set To All&#039;&#039;&#039; will fill all matches in that phase with the same value.&lt;br /&gt;
After the very first schedule has been done, a dropdown menu will also appear, filled in by all the scheduled matches already set. From the following phase a shortcut is offered to speed up the process: inserting &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and the number of minutes of offset in the &amp;quot;time&amp;quot; field and a duration, clicking on &amp;quot;Set to all&amp;quot; will automagically calculate the correct time and fill in the whole phase. It is also possible to select an already planned schedule from the drop down selector and click on &amp;quot;set to all&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
This setup is mandatory in case of:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG Pro/Live]] is planned for electronic scoring&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|Field of Play]] printout for field management&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Warm Up Schedule==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Competition/Warm_Up_Schedule]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage Running Events==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Running-Events.png|thumb|Running Events Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes the gathering of scoring (manual or electronic) is not at the same end for everybody: competitions with categories shooting over multiple sessions, Field, 3D, ISK-NG in lite mode. This pages comes in handy as it calculates (and shows) results as average arrow points up to 3 decimals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first column of each Round shows the lowest and highest arrows shot for each event.{{Note|text=It is important to have [[Participants#IRM]] correctly set up in order to have consistency on these numbers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Competition]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Team_Events_Setup/sv&amp;diff=4560</id>
		<title>Competition/Team Events Setup/sv</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Team_Events_Setup/sv&amp;diff=4560"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:27:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Detta är sidan för &#039;&#039;&#039;inställning&#039;&#039;&#039;. Klicka på &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Inställningar lagfinaler]]&#039;&#039;&#039; för att gå till administrationssidorna.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Att planera lagfinaler minskar risken för fel och gör resultathanteringen enklare, särskilt om ISK-NG planeras att användas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inställningar finaler ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Team-Main.png|thumb|Lista över lagfinaler]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Tävling =&amp;gt; Inställningar lagfinaler =&amp;gt; Inställningar finaler&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; visar listan över lagfinaler.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Fianlkod&#039;&#039;&#039;: Finalklassens kod kod. Detta är den kod som används i hela ianseo. När posten har sparats ändras den till en &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;knapp&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; för att ändra vilka kategorier och eventuellt underklasser som är behöriga att skjuta i denna final (se [[#Val av tävlingskategori]])&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Namn&#039;&#039;&#039;: beskrivning av finalklassen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: markera för att aktivera som paratävling&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordning&#039;&#039;&#039;: ordningen som tävlingen listas i&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Elimineringar&#039;&#039;&#039;: typ av eliminering. Se [[#Elimineringstyper]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Matchpoängsystem&#039;&#039;&#039;: välj poängräkningsformat (kumulativt eller set-system) för tävlingen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Första fas&#039;&#039;&#039;: välj första fasen för finalstegsdelen i denna tävling. Kontrollera gärna mot [[Participants#Statistics]] för att ställa in rätt startfas utifrån faktiskt antal deltagare. Välj &amp;quot;--&amp;quot; (ingen startfas) för att skapa tävlingar utan finalstegar.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tapettyp&#039;&#039;&#039;: välj rätt tapettyp för denna tävling&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ø (cm)&#039;&#039;&#039;: diameter (i cm) på tapeten&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Avstånd&#039;&#039;&#039;: skjutavstånd. Kan vara 0 för tävlingar där avståndet varierar mellan faser eller serier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Val av finalkategori ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Code.png|thumb|Val av kategori]]&lt;br /&gt;
Behörighet för kategori och eventuella subklasser definieras på den här sidan. Välj vilka kategorier som är behöriga. Flera val görs med CTRL+klick(win),⌘+klick(mac). Standard är att inget subklassfilter används – det måste aktiveras manuellt för att börja gälla.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Avancerat ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Code-Advanced.png|thumb|Val av kategori, avancerat]]&lt;br /&gt;
Knappen &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Advancerade inställninagr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; öppnar några utökade fält. Dessa värden är kritiska för att tävlingsresultaten ska fungera korrekt:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Antal skyttar/lag att välja&#039;&#039;&#039;: beräknas automatiskt utifrån startfasen, men kan ändras för att minska urvalet: högst rankade skyttar får bye&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Placering för första skytt/lag att välja&#039;&#039;&#039;: vanligtvis &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; för vanliga finalstegar, men kan sättas till ett annat värde, till exempel för att hantera sekundära tävlingar med lägre rankade skyttar&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Är medaljtävling&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om tävlingen ska ge medaljer&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Vinnarens slutplacering i tävlingen&#039;&#039;&#039;: sätt detta till den första placeringen efter att tävlingen är avslutad. Bör vara samma som &#039;&#039;placering för första skytt&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Kod för överordnad finaldel&#039;&#039;&#039;: om denna finaldel är en underordnad final till en annan, lämna då kategorivalet ovan tomt eftersom motståndarna blir utslagna/vinnare från den överordnade tävlingen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Välj vinnare från överordnad tävling&#039;&#039;&#039;: om &#039;&#039;kod för överordnad tävling&#039;&#039; är vald anger detta om tävlingen ska fyllas med utslagna (standard) eller vinnare från tidigare tävlingar&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold-etikett&#039;&#039;&#039;: etikett för första nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;XNine-etikett&#039;&#039;&#039;: etikett för andra nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Poäng som Gold&#039;&#039;&#039;: poäng som ska räknas med i första nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Poäng som XNine&#039;&#039;&#039;: poäng som ska räknas med i andra nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Räkna Golds vid lika&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om lika resultat ska särskiljas med första särskiljningen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Räkna XNine vid lika&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om lika resultat ska särskiljas med andra särskiljningen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ranking AFTER following distance&#039;&#039;&#039;: vanligtvis satt till &amp;quot;last&amp;quot;, kan ändras för att passa särskilda behov i tävlingsformatet&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximalt antal lagmedlemmar&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximalt antal skyttar i laget&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WA-kategori&#039;&#039;&#039;: motsvarighet mellan denna tävling och WA-kategorin, om sådan finns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Elimineringstyper ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Elimination-Type.png|thumb|Elimineringstyper]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standard är &amp;quot;Regular brackets&amp;quot;, men kan ändras till andra typer av eliminering.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=error|text=Om detta värde ändras kommer referenser och matcher för den tidigare elimineringstypen bokstavligen att raderas, och alla objekt som behövs för resultatadministration i den nya typen skapas om.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round Robin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-RR.png|thumb|Inställningar för Round Robin-final]]&lt;br /&gt;
Round Robin – grundinställningen för den här finalen anger bara hur många ”waves” av Round Robin-matcher som ska genomföras innan skyttar placeras in i de slutliga stegen (om sådana används).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Nivåer&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal Round Robin-nivåer som ska genomföras (se [[Round Robin]] för komplett inställning)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Skyttar per tavla ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Opponents.png|thumb|Inställning av motståndare per tavla och fas]]&lt;br /&gt;
Den här sidan visar en komplett tabell över hur många skyttar per tavla som är inställt för alla faser i finalen. Den anger också om matcherna ska skjutas i ett skjutlag eller två.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=En meny gör det enkelt att växla mellan &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Individuellt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; och &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Lag&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, samt att växla mellan &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Motståndare per tavla&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; och &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Hantera pilar per set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Pilar per set ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Arrows.png|thumb|Inställningar för pilar och serier]]&lt;br /&gt;
Fälten behöver kontrolleras, särskilt när du skapar nya finaler. Varje final har 2 rader: en för elimineringsfaser (upp till och med 1/8) och en för finalfaser (1/4, 1/2, medaljer), eftersom antal serier och pilar per serie kan skilja mellan de två. Blå och gröna punkter visar hur faserna kommer att skjutas.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Tavlornas nummer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Targets.png|thumb|Tavelplacering för finalstegar]]&lt;br /&gt;
Välj först den finalklass du vill arbeta med. Ett rutnät visas utifrån inställningarna i [[#Skyttar på tavlor]]: ett fält för båda motståndarna om 2 lag per tavla (de tilldelas då som 1A och 1B), ett fält per motståndare om ett lag per tavla. Det finns några genvägar som underlättar tavelplaceringen.&lt;br /&gt;
Denna inställning är obligatorisk om:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG]] planeras för elektronisk poängregistrering&lt;br /&gt;
* utskrift av [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|tävlingsfält]] ska användas för fälthantering&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Team Finals#Score|Skyttarnas scorekort]] ska ha tilldelad tavelruta vid vinst&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Schemaläggning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Schedule.png|thumb|Matchschemaläggning]]&lt;br /&gt;
Som tidigare väljer du först den finalklass du vill arbeta med. Ett rutnät visas där information kan anges för varje match eller globalt för en hel fas. Varje fas har överst fält för att ange datum (format dag-månad-år), tid och en valfri matchlängd. När detta är angivet fyller ett klick på &#039;&#039;&#039;Set To All&#039;&#039;&#039; alla matcher i den fasen med samma värde.&lt;br /&gt;
När den allra första schemaläggningen har gjorts visas även en rullgardinsmeny, ifylld med alla matcher som redan har schemalagts. Från nästa fas erbjuds en genväg för att snabba upp processen: om du anger &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; och antal minuters förskjutning i fältet &amp;quot;tid&amp;quot; samt en längd, och klickar på &amp;quot;Set to all&amp;quot;, beräknas rätt tid automatiskt och hela fasen fylls i. Det går också att välja en redan planerad schematid från rullgardinsmenyn och klicka på &amp;quot;set to all&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
Denna inställning är obligatorisk om:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG Pro/Live]] planeras för elektronisk poängregistrering&lt;br /&gt;
* utskrift av [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|tävlingsfält]] ska användas för fälthantering&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Uppvärmningsschema ==&lt;br /&gt;
Se [[Tävling/Uppvärmningsschema]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Ställ in löpande resultatlistor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Running-Events.png|thumb|Ställ in löpande resultatlistor]]&lt;br /&gt;
Ibland sker insamlingen av poäng (manuell eller elektronisk) inte vid samma serie för alla: tävlingar med kategorier som skjuter över flera skjutlag, Field, 3D, ISK-NG i lite-läge. Den här sidan är då användbar eftersom den beräknar (och visar) resultat som genomsnittlig pilpoäng med upp till 3 decimaler.&lt;br /&gt;
Den första kolumnen i varje omgång visar lägsta och högsta antal skjutna pilar för varje tävling.{{Note|text=Det är viktigt att [[Participants#IRM]] är korrekt inställt för att dessa siffror ska vara konsekventa}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first column of each Round shows the lowest and highest arrows shot for each event.{{Note|text=It is important to have [[Participants#IRM]] correctly set up in order to have consistency on these numbers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Kategori:Tävling]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Innehåll}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Team_Events_Setup/it&amp;diff=4559</id>
		<title>Competition/Team Events Setup/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Team_Events_Setup/it&amp;diff=4559"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:27:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Questa è la pagina di &#039;&#039;&#039;Configurazione&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicca su &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Team Finals/it|Finali a Squadre]]&#039;&#039;&#039; per andare alle pagine di Gestione}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La pianificazione delle Finali a Squadre riduce la possibilità di commettere errori e aumenta la facilità di gestione dei risultati, soprattutto se si prevede di utilizzare l&#039;ISK-NG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gestione degli Eventi==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Team-Main.png|thumb|Lista Eventi a Squadre]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Impostazioni per le Finali a Squadre =&amp;gt; Gestione degli Eventi&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; mostra la lista degli Eventi a Squadre.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codice Evento&#039;&#039;&#039;: Codice dell&#039;Evento. Questo è il codice che verrà utilizzato in tutto Ianseo. Si trasforma in un &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;pulsante&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dopo aver salvato per modificare le Divisioni/Classi ed eventualmente le Categorie che possono partecipare a questo evento. (vedi [[#Selezione Divisioni/Classi Evento]])&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Nome Evento&#039;&#039;&#039;: descrizione dell&#039;Evento&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Paralimpico/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: spunta per abilitare l&#039;Evento come Paralimpico&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordine&#039;&#039;&#039;: l&#039;ordine in cui l&#039;Evento sarà in elenco&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gironi Eliminatori&#039;&#039;&#039;: tipo di eliminazioni. Vedi [[#Tipologia di Girone Eliminatorio]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punteggi dei match&#039;&#039;&#039;: selezionare il formato dei punteggi per l&#039;evento (sistema cumulativo o sistema a set)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Fase di Partenza&#039;&#039;&#039;: selezionare la prima fase per le griglie di scontri di questo evento. Controllare in [[Participants/it#Statistiche|Statistiche Partecipanti]] per impostare la fase iniziale corretta in base al numero effettivo di partecipanti. Seleziona &amp;quot;--&amp;quot; (nessuna fase iniziale) per creare eventi senza griglie di scontri.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tipologia Bersaglio&#039;&#039;&#039;: seleziona il bersaglio corretto per l&#039;Evento&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ø (cm)&#039;&#039;&#039;: diametro (in cm) del bersaglio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Distanza&#039;&#039;&#039;: Distanza di tiro. Può essere 0 per eventi in cui la distanza varia tra le fasi elimatorie o le volée.&lt;br /&gt;
* Il pulsante &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Crea o Elimina Eventi in base ai partecipanti&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creerà o eliminerà eventi in base alle Divisioni/Classi non impostate come parte di un evento o eliminerà eventi in cui non sono presenti arcieri idonei.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Selezione Divisioni/Classi Evento===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Code-IT.png|thumb|Divisioni e Classi ammesse]]&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ammissibilità di Divisioni/Classi e eventualmente Categorie è definita in questa pagina. Selezionare le Div/Classi ammissibili. Le selezioni multiple si effettuano con CTRL+Click. Come impostazione predefinita non esiste il filtro delle Categorie, per poterlo utilizzare deve essere abilitato manualmente.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Gestione Avanzata====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Code-Advanced-IT.png|thumb|Gestione Avanzata Div/Classi]]&lt;br /&gt;
Il pulsante &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Gestione Avanzata dei Turni&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; apre alcuni campi avanzati. Questi valori sono fondamentali per la corretta creazione dei risultati dell&#039;evento:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Numero di Atleti/Squadre da selezionare&#039;&#039;&#039;: calcolato automaticamente in base alla fase di partenza impostata, può essere modificato per ridurre la selezione solamente affinchè: le squadre meglio classificate abbiano un bye&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Rank del primo Atleta/Squadra da selezionare&#039;&#039;&#039;: solitamente &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; per delle griglie di scontro regolare, può essere impostato su un altro valore, ad esempio per gestire gare secondarie con squadre più in basso in classifica&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;È un evento con medaglie&#039;&#039;&#039;: seleziona se per l&#039;evento ci sarà una premiazione&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Rank finale del vincitore dell&#039;evento&#039;&#039;&#039;: imposta questo valore alla prima squadra della rank dopo il termine dell&#039;evento. Dovrebbe essere uguale a &#039;&#039;Rank del primo Atleta&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codice Evento Genitore&#039;&#039;&#039;: Se questo evento è figlio di un altro evento, allora lasciare vuota la selezione della Div/Classe di cui sopra, in quanto gli avversari saranno gli eliminati/vincitori dell&#039;evento genitore.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Seleziona i vincitori dell&#039;evento genitore&#039;&#039;&#039;: se è selezionato un &#039;&#039;Codice Evento Genitore&#039;&#039;, definisce se l&#039;evento sarà popolato dalle squadre eliminate (default) o dalle vincitrici degli eventi precedenti&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Etichetta 1°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: Etichetta da impostare per il 1° livello di spareggio &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Etichetta 2°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: Etichetta da impostare per il 2° livello di spareggio &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punti usati come 1°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: Punti da utilizzare per il calcolo del 1° livello di spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punti usati come 2°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: Punti da utilizzare per il calcolo del 2° livello di spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Controlla il 1°spareggio nei Parimeriti&#039;&#039;&#039;: Stabilisce se i pareggi dovrebbero essere interrotti dopo il primo spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Controlla il 2°spareggio nei Parimeriti&#039;&#039;&#039;: Stabilisce se i pareggi devono essere interrotti dopo il secondo spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Classifica dopo la distanza seguente&#039;&#039;&#039;: Solitamente impostata &amp;quot;Ultima&amp;quot;, può essere modificata per adattarsi alle esigenze specifiche del formato di gara&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Numero massimo di componenti della squadra&#039;&#039;&#039;: Numero massimo di componenti che costituiscono la squadra.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Categoria WA&#039;&#039;&#039;: Equivalenza tra l&#039;evento e la Div/Classe WA, se presente.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Tipologia di Girone Eliminatorio===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Elimination-Type-IT.png|thumb|Tipologie di Girone Eliminatorio]]&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;impostazione predefinita è “Griglie Standard”, ma può essere modificata con altre tipologie di eliminazione.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=error|text=La modifica di questo valore eliminerà completamente i riferimenti e gli scontri della tipologia di eliminazione precedente, ricreerà tutti gli elementi necessari per gestire i risultati per questa nuova tipologia.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Gironi all&#039;italiana====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Team-Elimination-RR-IT.png|thumb|Impostazione Evento Gironi all&#039;italiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;impostazione generale dei Gironi all&#039;italiana per l&#039;evento richiede solo di impostare il numero di “turni” di scontri di Gironi all&#039;italiana che si terranno fino alla collocazione delle squadre nelle griglie degli scontri finali (se presenti).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Livelli&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di livelli di gironi all&#039;italiana che si terranno (vedasi [[Round Robin|Gironi all&#039;italiana]] per la configurazione completa)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Numero Arcieri per Piazzola==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Team-Opponents-IT.png|thumb|Impostazioni bersaglio e fase degli scontri]]&lt;br /&gt;
Questa pagina mostra una tabella completa di quante squadre per piazzola sono previste per tutte le fasi dell&#039;evento. L&#039;impostazione classica è 1 squadra per piazzola. Stabilisce inoltre se gli scontri saranno disputati in un&#039;unico turno o in due turni.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Una tendina consente di passare facilmente dall&#039;impostazione &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Individuale&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Squadra&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, così come di passare da &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Avversari per Piazzola&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Gestione frecce per set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Frecce per set==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Team-Arrows-IT.png|thumb|Impostazione Frecce e Volée]]&lt;br /&gt;
I campi devono essere controllati, soprattutto quando si creano nuovi eventi. Ogni evento ha 2 linee, una per le fasi “Eliminatorie” (fino agli 1/8 inclusi) e una per le fasi “Finali” (1/4, 1/2, Finale Oro/Bronzo), poiché le volée e le frecce per volée possono cambiare tra le due. I punti blu e verdi mostrano come saranno tirate le fasi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Numeri dei Bersagli==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Team-Targets-IT.png|thumb|Assegnazione Piazzole per le griglie]]&lt;br /&gt;
Selezionare innanzitutto l&#039;evento su cui lavorare. Apparirà una griglia basata sulle selezioni impostate in [[#Numero Arcieri per Piazzola]]: Un campo per entrambe le squadre se tirano 2 squadre per piazzola (saranno assegnati come 1A e 1B), un campo per squadra se è stata impostata una sola squadra per piazzola. Esistono alcune scorciatoie per facilitare l&#039;assegnazione dei bersagli.&lt;br /&gt;
Questa impostazione è obbligatoria in caso di:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK/it|ISK-NG]] è previsto per lo score elettronico&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition/it#Layout_campo_di_gara_delle_finali|Campo di Gara]] stampa per la gestione del campo di gara&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Team_Finals/it#Scorecard_Printout|Stampa Score Squadre]] con la piazzola successiva già designata in caso di vittoria/sconfitta&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Gestione Programma==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Team-Schedule-IT.png|thumb|Programma degli scontri]]&lt;br /&gt;
Come prima, per prima cosa selezionare l&#039;evento su cui lavorare. Apparirà una griglia in cui si possono inserire le informazioni per ogni scontro o globalmente per un&#039;intera fase. Ogni Fase ha in alto i campi per inserire una data (formato giorno-mese-anno), un&#039;ora di inizio e una durata (opzionale) dello scontro. Una volta impostato, cliccando su ‘&#039;Imposta a Tutti’&#039; si riempiranno tutti gli scontri di quella fase con lo stesso valore.&lt;br /&gt;
Dopo aver effettuato la prima programmazione, apparirà un menu a tendina con tutti gli scontri nel programma che sono già stati impostati. Dalla fase successiva viene offerta una scorciatoia per velocizzare il processo: inserendo “+” e il numero di minuti di sfasamento nel campo ‘orario’ ed una durata nel campo ‘Durata scontro (min.)’, cliccando su “Imposta a Tutti” si calcolerà automaticamente l&#039;orario corretto e si compilerà l&#039;intera fase. È anche possibile selezionare un programma già pianificato dal menù a tendina e fare clic su “Imposta su Tutti”.&lt;br /&gt;
Questa impostazione è obbligatoria in caso di:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK/it|ISK-NG Pro/Live]] è previsto per lo score elettronico&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition/it#Layout_campo_di_gara_delle_finali|Campo di Gara]] stampa per la gestione del campo di gara&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sessioni di Riscaldamento==&lt;br /&gt;
Vedasi [[Competition/Warm_Up_Schedule/it|Torneo/Sessioni di Riscaldamento]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Gestisci gli eventi &amp;quot;Running&amp;quot;==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Running-Events-IT.png|thumb|Gestione degli eventi &amp;quot;Running&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
A volte la raccolta dei punteggi (manuale o elettronica) non è alla stessa volée per tutti: gare con Divisioni/Classi che tirano in più sessioni, HF, 3D, ISK-NG in modalità Lite. Questa pagina è utile perché calcola (e mostra) i risultati come media dei punti freccia fino a 3 decimali.&lt;br /&gt;
La prima colonna di ogni turno mostra il numero più basso e più alto di frecce che è stato tirato per ciascun evento.{{Note|text=È importante avere impostato correttamente [[Participants/it#IRM_Status_Management|IRM Partecipanti]] per avere coerenza con questi numeri}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first column of each Round shows the lowest and highest arrows shot for each event.{{Note|text=It is important to have [[Participants#IRM]] correctly set up in order to have consistency on these numbers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Torneo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/16/en&amp;diff=4558</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Team Events Setup/16/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/16/en&amp;diff=4558"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:27:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The first column of each Round shows the lowest and highest arrows shot for each event.{{Note|text=It is important to have [[Participants#IRM]] correctly set up in order to have consistency on these numbers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/13/en&amp;diff=4557</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Team Events Setup/13/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/13/en&amp;diff=4557"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:27:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Manage Running Events==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Running-Events.png|thumb|Running Events Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes the gathering of scoring (manual or electronic) is not at the same end for everybody: competitions with categories shooting over multiple sessions, Field, 3D, ISK-NG in lite mode. This pages comes in handy as it calculates (and shows) results as average arrow points up to 3 decimals.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/11/en&amp;diff=4556</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Team Events Setup/11/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/11/en&amp;diff=4556"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:27:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Scheduling==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Schedule.png|thumb|Match Scheduling]]As before, first select the event to work on. A grid will appear where information can be inserted for every match or globally for a whole phase. Each Phase has at the top the fields to insert a date (format day-month-year), a time and an optional duration of the match. Once set, clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;Set To All&#039;&#039;&#039; will fill all matches in that phase with the same value.&lt;br /&gt;
After the very first schedule has been done, a dropdown menu will also appear, filled in by all the scheduled matches already set. From the following phase a shortcut is offered to speed up the process: inserting &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and the number of minutes of offset in the &amp;quot;time&amp;quot; field and a duration, clicking on &amp;quot;Set to all&amp;quot; will automagically calculate the correct time and fill in the whole phase. It is also possible to select an already planned schedule from the drop down selector and click on &amp;quot;set to all&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
This setup is mandatory in case of:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG Pro/Live]] is planned for electronic scoring&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|Field of Play]] printout for field management&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/10/en&amp;diff=4555</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Team Events Setup/10/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/10/en&amp;diff=4555"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:27:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Targets Number==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Targets.png|thumb|Target Assignment for Grids]]First select the event to work on. A grid will appear based on the selections set in [[#Archers on Targets]]: One field for both opponents if 2 teams per target (they will be assigned as 1A and 1B), one field per opponent if one team per target. There are some shortcuts to ease the target assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
This setup is mandatory in case of:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG]] is planned for electronic scoring&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|Field of Play]] printout for field management&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Team Finals#Score|Athletes Sheets]] with assigned target box in case of win&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/9/en&amp;diff=4554</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Team Events Setup/9/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/9/en&amp;diff=4554"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:27:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Arrows per Set==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Arrows.png|thumb|Arrows and Ends Setup]]Fields need to be checked, especially when creating new events. Each event has 2 lines, one for &amp;quot;Elimination&amp;quot; phases (up to 1/8 included) and one for &amp;quot;Finals&amp;quot; phases (1/4, 1/2, Medals) as ends and arrows per end might change between the 2. Blue and Green dots will show how the phases will be shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/8/en&amp;diff=4553</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Team Events Setup/8/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Team_Events_Setup/8/en&amp;diff=4553"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:27:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Archers on Targets==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Team-Opponents.png|thumb|Target and Phase Opponents Setup]]This page shows a comprehensive table of how many Teams per target are set for all the phases of the event. It usually defaults to 1 team per target. It also establishes if matches will be shot in a single wave or in two waves.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=A selector enables an easy switch between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Individual&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Team&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; setup, as well as switch between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Opponents per Target&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Manage Phase&#039;s Arrows per Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/en&amp;diff=4550</id>
		<title>Competition/Individual Events Setup/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/en&amp;diff=4550"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:24:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=This is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Set up&#039;&#039;&#039; page. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Individual Finals]]&#039;&#039;&#039; to go to the Management pages}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Planning Individual Finals reduces the possibility of making errors and increase the ease of results management, especially if the ISK-NG is planned to be used&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage Events==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Main.png|thumb|Individual Events List]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Individual Events Setup =&amp;gt; Manage Events&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; shows the list of individual events.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Event Code&#039;&#039;&#039;: Code of the event. This is the code that will be used throughout ianseo. It changes into a &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;button&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; when saved in order to change which categories and eventually subclasses are eligible to shoot in this event (see [[#Event Category Selection]])&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Event Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: description of the event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: check to enable as para event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;: order by which the event will be listed&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Eliminations&#039;&#039;&#039;: type of elimination. See [[#Elimination Types]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Match Scoring&#039;&#039;&#039;: select the scoring format (cumulative or set system) for the event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;First Phase&#039;&#039;&#039;: select the first phase for the brackets part of this event. Please check with [[Participants#Statistics]] to set the correct starting phase based on the actual participant numbers. Select &amp;quot;--&amp;quot; (no starting phase) to create events without brackets.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: select the correct target type for this event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ø (cm)&#039;&#039;&#039;: diameter (in cm) of the target&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Distance&#039;&#039;&#039;: Shooting distance. Can be 0 for events where the distance varies between phases or ends.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Create and Delete Events based on Participants&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button will create or delete events based on the categories not set as part of an event or delete events where no eligible archers are present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Event Category Selection===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Code.png|thumb|Category Selection]]&lt;br /&gt;
Category and eventual subclass eligibility is defined in this page. Select which categories are eligible. Multiple selections are made with CTRL+Click. Default is no subclass filter, it must be enabled manually to be used.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Advanced====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Code-Advanced.png|thumb|Category Selection, Advanced]]&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Advanced&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button opens some extended fields. These values are critical for the correct behaviour of the event results:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Number of Athletes/Teams to Select&#039;&#039;&#039;: automatically calculated based on the starting phase, can be changed to reduce the selection only: top ranked archers will have a bye&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Rank of First Athlete/Team to Select&#039;&#039;&#039;: usually &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; for regular brackets, can be set to another value, for example to manage secondary competitions with lower ranked archers&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Is a Medal Event&#039;&#039;&#039;: selects if the event will be awarded&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Event&#039;s Winner Final Rank&#039;&#039;&#039;: set this to the first ranked after the event is finished. Should be the same as &#039;&#039;Rank of first athlete&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Event Code&#039;&#039;&#039;: If this event is a child of another event, then leave the category selection above empty as the opponents will be the dropout/winner of the parent event&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Winners of Parent Event&#039;&#039;&#039;: if &#039;&#039;Parent Event Code&#039;&#039; is selected, defines if the event will be populated by the dropouts (default) or the winners of previous events&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: Label to set for the first level tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;XNine Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: Label to set for the second level tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as Gold&#039;&#039;&#039;: Points to be retained to calculate the first level tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as XNine&#039;&#039;&#039;: Points to be retained to calculate the second level tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Check Golds in Ties&#039;&#039;&#039;: Establishes if ties should be break based on the first tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Check XNine in Ties&#039;&#039;&#039;: Establishes if ties should be break based on the second tie breaker&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ranking AFTER following distance&#039;&#039;&#039;: Usually set as &amp;quot;last&amp;quot;, can be changed to accommodate specific needs of the competition format&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WA Category&#039;&#039;&#039;: Equivalence between this event and the WA category if any&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Elimination Types===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-Type.png|thumb|Elimination Types]]&lt;br /&gt;
Defaults to &amp;quot;Regular brackets&amp;quot;, but can be changed to other types of elimination.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=error|text=Changing this value will litterally kill the previous elimination type references and matches and recreate the all items needed to manage results for this new type.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====1(2) Elim.Round====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-Field.png|thumb|Intermediate Elimination Rounds Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
This kind of elimination will place 1 or 2 intermediate rounds before placing qualified archers into the final brackets. Some fields need to be entered or verified for each round:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Archers&#039;&#039;&#039;: Number of archers to select&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ends&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends to shoot&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrows&#039;&#039;&#039;: number f arrows per end&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Shoot Off&#039;&#039;&#039;: SO arrows&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====World Games(Archery) Pools====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-WG.png|thumb|World Games/Archery Pools Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
This kind of elimination prepares 2/4 Shoot Up pools where athletes ranked 3 or more after qualification will be placed, with (WG) or without (WA) beauty match between first and second ranked. As usual some fields need to be entered or verified:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Archers&#039;&#039;&#039;: Number of archers to be placed in the pools&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ends&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends to shoot&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrows&#039;&#039;&#039;: number f arrows per end&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Shoot Off&#039;&#039;&#039;: SO arrows&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Round Robin====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-RR.png|thumb|Round Robin Event Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
Round Robin global setup for this event only need to set how many &amp;quot;waves&amp;quot; of Round Robin matches will be held until placing archers in the final brackets (if any).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Levels&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of Round Robin levels will be held (see [[Round Robin]] for the complete setup)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Archers on Targets==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Opponents.png|thumb|Target and Phase Opponents Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page shows a comprehensive table of how many archers per target are set for all the phases of the event. It also establishes if matches will be shot in a single wave or in two waves.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=A selector enables an easy switch between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Individual&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Team&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; setup, as well as switch between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Opponents per Target&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Manage Phase&#039;s Arrows per Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Arrows per Set==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Arrows.png|thumb|Arrows and Ends Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
Fields need to be checked, especially when creating new events. Each event has 2 lines, one for &amp;quot;Elimination&amp;quot; phases (up to 1/8 included) and one for &amp;quot;Finals&amp;quot; phases (1/4, 1/2, Medals) as ends and arrows per end might change between the 2. Blue and Green dots will show how the phases will be shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Targets Number==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Targets.png|thumb|Target Assignment for Grids]]&lt;br /&gt;
First select the event to work on. A grid will appear based on the selections set in [[#Archers on Targets]]: One field for both opponents if 2 archers per target (they will be assigned as 1A and 1B), one field per opponent if one archer per target. There are some shortcuts to ease the target assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
This setup is mandatory in case of:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG]] is planned for electronic scoring&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|Field of Play]] printout for field management&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Individual Finals#Score|Athletes Sheets]] with assigned target box in case of win&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduling==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Schedule.png|thumb|Match Scheduling]]&lt;br /&gt;
As before, first select the event to work on. A grid will appear where information can be inserted for every match or globally for a whole phase. Each Phase has at the top the fields to insert a date (format day-month-year), a time and an optional duration of the match. Once set, clicking on &#039;&#039;&#039;Set To All&#039;&#039;&#039; will fill all matches in that phase with the same value.&lt;br /&gt;
After the very first schedule has been done, a dropdown menu will also appear, filled in by all the scheduled matches already set. From the following phase a shortcut is offered to speed up the process: inserting &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and the number of minutes of offset in the &amp;quot;time&amp;quot; field and a duration, clicking on &amp;quot;Set to all&amp;quot; will automagically calculate the correct time and fill in the whole phase. It is also possible to select an already planned schedule from the drop down selector and click on &amp;quot;set to all&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
This setup is mandatory in case of:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG Pro/Live]] is planned for electronic scoring&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|Field of Play]] printout for field management&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Warm Up Schedule==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Competition/Warm_Up_Schedule]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage Running Events==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Running-Events.png|thumb|Running Events Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes the gathering of scoring (manual or electronic) is not at the same end for everybody: competitions with categories shooting over multiple sessions, Field, 3D, ISK-NG in lite mode. This pages comes in handy as it calculates (and shows) results as average arrow points up to 3 decimals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first column of each Round shows the lowest and highest arrows shot for each event.{{Note|text=It is important to have [[Participants#IRM]] correctly set up in order to have consistency on these numbers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Competition]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/sv&amp;diff=4549</id>
		<title>Competition/Individual Events Setup/sv</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/sv&amp;diff=4549"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:24:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Det här är &#039;&#039;&#039;inställningssidan&#039;&#039;&#039;. Klicka på &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Inställningar finaler]]&#039;&#039;&#039; för att gå till inställningar}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Planering av individuella finaler minskar risken för misstag och gör resultathanteringen enklare, särskilt om ISK-NG är tänkt att användas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hantera finaler ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Main.png|thumb|Lista över individuella finaler]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Tävling =&amp;gt; Individuella finaler – inställningar =&amp;gt; Hantera finaler&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; visar listan över individuella finaler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Finalkod&#039;&#039;&#039;: finalens kod. Det är den kod som används i hela i@nseo. När den har sparats blir den en &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;knapp&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; för att ändra vilka kategorier och eventuella subklasser som är behöriga att skjuta den här finalen (se [[#Val av finalkategori]]).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Finalnamn&#039;&#039;&#039;: beskrivning av finalen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: markera för att aktivera som para-final&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordning&#039;&#039;&#039;: i vilken ordning finalen listas&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Elimineringar&#039;&#039;&#039;: typ av eliminering. Se [[#Elimineringstyper]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Matchpoäng&#039;&#039;&#039;: välj poängformat (ackumulerat eller set-system) för finalen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Första fas&#039;&#039;&#039;: välj första fas för stegen i den här finalen. Kontrollera gärna med [[Participants#Statistics]] för att sätta korrekt startfas utifrån faktiskt antal deltagare. Välj &amp;quot;--&amp;quot; (ingen startfas) för att skapa finaler utan steg.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tavltyp&#039;&#039;&#039;: välj rätt tavltyp för den här finalen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ø (cm)&#039;&#039;&#039;: tavlans diameter (i cm)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Avstånd&#039;&#039;&#039;: skjutavstånd. Kan vara 0 för finaler där avståndet varierar mellan faser eller serier.&lt;br /&gt;
* Knappen &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Skapa/radera finalklasser baserat på deltagare&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; skapar eller tar bort finaler baserat på kategorier som inte ingår i någon final, eller tar bort finaler där inga behöriga skyttar finns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Val av finalkategori ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Code.png|thumb|Val av kategori]]&lt;br /&gt;
Behörighet för kategori och eventuella subklasser definieras på den här sidan. Välj vilka kategorier som är behöriga. Flera val görs med CTRL+klick(win),⌘+klick(mac). Standard är att inget subklassfilter används – det måste aktiveras manuellt för att börja gälla.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Avancerat ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Code-Advanced.png|thumb|Val av kategori, avancerat]]&lt;br /&gt;
Knappen &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Avancerat&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; öppnar utökade fält. Dessa värden är kritiska för att finalens resultat ska fungera korrekt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Antal skyttar/lag att välja&#039;&#039;&#039;: beräknas automatiskt utifrån startfasen, men kan ändras för att bara minska urvalet: högst rankade skyttar får då bye&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Rankning för första skytt/lag att välja&#039;&#039;&#039;: vanligtvis &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; i vanliga steg, men kan sättas till ett annat värde, t.ex. för att hantera sekundära tävlingar med lägre rankade skyttar&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Är en medaljfinal&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om finalen ska ge medalj/utmärkelse&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Finalvinnarnas slutrankning&#039;&#039;&#039;: sätt detta till den rankning som vinnaren ska få när finalen är avslutad. Bör vara samma som &#039;&#039;Rankning för första skytt&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Överliggande finalkod&#039;&#039;&#039;: om den här finalen är underliggande till en annan final, lämna kategorivalet ovan tomt eftersom motståndarna då kommer att vara utslagna/vinnare från den överliggande finalen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Välj vinnare från överliggande final&#039;&#039;&#039;: om &#039;&#039;Överliggande finalkod&#039;&#039; är vald, anger om finalen ska fyllas med utslagna (standard) eller vinnare från tidigare finaler&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: etikett för första nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;XNine Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: etikett för andra nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as Gold&#039;&#039;&#039;: poäng som används för att räkna ut första nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as XNine&#039;&#039;&#039;: poäng som används för att räkna ut andra nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Kontrollera Golds vid lika&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om lika resultat ska avgöras med första särskiljningen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Kontrollera XNine vid lika&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om lika resultat ska avgöras med andra nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ranking EFTER följande avstånd&#039;&#039;&#039;: vanligtvis &amp;quot;last&amp;quot;, men kan ändras för att passa särskilda behov i tävlingsformatet&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WA-kategori&#039;&#039;&#039;: eventuell koppling mellan den här finalen och motsvarande WA-kategori&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Elimineringstyper ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-Type.png|thumb|Elimineringstyper]]&lt;br /&gt;
Standard är “Regular brackets”, men kan ändras till andra typer av eliminering.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=error|text=Om du ändrar detta värde kommer det bokstavligen att radera tidigare referenser och matcher för elimineringstypen och återskapa allt som behövs för att hantera resultat för den nya typen.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1(2) elimineringsrond(er) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-Field.png|thumb|Inställningar för mellanliggande elimineringsronder]]&lt;br /&gt;
Den här typen av eliminering lägger 1 eller 2 mellanliggande ronder innan kvalificerade skyttar placeras in i de slutliga stegen. För varje rond behöver vissa fält anges eller kontrolleras:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Skyttar&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal skyttar som ska väljas&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Serier&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal serier som ska skjutas&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Pilar&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal pilar per serie&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Särskjutning&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal särskjutningspilar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== World Games (Archery) – pooler ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-WG.png|thumb|Inställningar för World Games/Archery-pooler]]&lt;br /&gt;
Den här typen av eliminering förbereder 2/4 ”Shoot Up”-pooler där skyttar som rankats 3:a eller sämre efter kval placeras, med (WG) eller utan (WA) ”beauty match” mellan 1:an och 2:an. Som vanligt behöver vissa fält anges eller kontrolleras:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Skyttar&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal skyttar som ska placeras i poolerna&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Serier&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal serier som ska skjutas&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Pilar&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal pilar per serie&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Särskjutning&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal särskjutningspilar&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Round Robin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-RR.png|thumb|Inställningar för Round Robin-final]]&lt;br /&gt;
Round Robin – grundinställningen för den här finalen anger bara hur många ”waves” av Round Robin-matcher som ska genomföras innan skyttar placeras in i de slutliga stegen (om sådana används).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Nivåer&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal Round Robin-nivåer som ska genomföras (se [[Round Robin]] för komplett inställning)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Skyttar per tavla ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Opponents.png|thumb|Inställning av motståndare per tavla och fas]]&lt;br /&gt;
Den här sidan visar en komplett tabell över hur många skyttar per tavla som är inställt för alla faser i finalen. Den anger också om matcherna ska skjutas i ett skjutlag eller två.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=En meny gör det enkelt att växla mellan &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Individuellt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; och &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Lag&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, samt att växla mellan &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Motståndare per tavla&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; och &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Hantera pilar per set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pilar per set ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Arrows.png|thumb|Inställningar för pilar och serier]]&lt;br /&gt;
Fälten behöver kontrolleras, särskilt när du skapar nya finaler. Varje final har 2 rader: en för elimineringsfaser (upp till och med 1/8) och en för finalfaser (1/4, 1/2, medaljer), eftersom antal serier och pilar per serie kan skilja mellan de två. Blå och gröna punkter visar hur faserna kommer att skjutas.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tavlnummer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Targets.png|thumb|Taveltilldelning för steg]]&lt;br /&gt;
Välj först vilken final du vill arbeta med. Därefter visas ett rutnät baserat på inställningarna i [[#Skyttar på tavlor]]: ett fält för båda motståndarna om 2 skyttar per tavla (de tilldelas som 1A och 1B), och ett fält per motståndare om 1 skytt per tavla. Det finns genvägar som underlättar taveltilldelningen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Den här inställningen är obligatorisk om:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG]] ska användas för elektronisk poängregistrering&lt;br /&gt;
* utskriften [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|Slutligt banupplägg för finaler]] ska användas för banhantering&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Individual Finals#Score|Skyttblad]] ska ha tilldelat tavelfält vid vinst&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Schemaläggning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Schedule.png|thumb|Schemaläggning av matcher]]&lt;br /&gt;
Precis som tidigare: välj först vilken final du vill arbeta med. Därefter visas ett rutnät där du kan ange information för varje match, eller globalt för en hel fas. Varje fas har överst fält för datum (format dag-månad-år), tid och en valfri matchlängd. När du har angett värdena kan du klicka på &#039;&#039;&#039;Ställ in på alla matcher i denna del.&#039;&#039;&#039; för att fylla alla matcher i den fasen med samma värden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Efter att den allra första schemaläggningen har gjorts visas även en rullgardinsmeny som fylls med alla redan schemalagda matcher. Från nästa fas erbjuds en genväg för att snabba upp: skriv &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; och antalet minuter som offset i fältet &amp;quot;time&amp;quot; samt en varaktighet. När du klickar på &amp;quot;Ställ in på alla matcher i denna del.&amp;quot; räknar systemet automatiskt ut rätt tider och fyller i hela fasen. Det går också att välja ett redan planerat schema i rullgardinen och klicka på &amp;quot;set to all&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Den här inställningen är obligatorisk om:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK|ISK-NG Pro/Live]] ska användas för elektronisk poängregistrering&lt;br /&gt;
* utskriften [[Competition#Final_Field_of_Play_Layout|Slutligt banupplägg för finaler]] ska användas för banhantering&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Uppvärmningsschema ==&lt;br /&gt;
Se [[Tävling/Uppvärmningsschema]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Ställ in löpande resultatlistor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Running-Events.png|thumb|Hantering av pågående finaler]]&lt;br /&gt;
Ibland avslutas inte poänginsamlingen (manuell eller elektronisk) samtidigt för alla: tävlingar där kategorier skjuter över flera omgångar, fält, 3D, eller ISK-NG i Lite-läge. Den här sidan är praktisk eftersom den beräknar (och visar) resultat som genomsnittliga pilpoäng med upp till 3 decimaler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Första kolumnen i varje rond visar lägsta och högsta antal pilar som skjutits för varje final.{{Note|text=Det är viktigt att [[Deltagarnas#IRM]] är korrekt inställt för att dessa siffror ska bli konsekventa}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first column of each Round shows the lowest and highest arrows shot for each event.{{Note|text=It is important to have [[Participants#IRM]] correctly set up in order to have consistency on these numbers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Kategori:Tävling]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Innehåll}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/it&amp;diff=4548</id>
		<title>Competition/Individual Events Setup/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/it&amp;diff=4548"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:24:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Questa è la pagina di &#039;&#039;&#039;Configurazione&#039;&#039;&#039;. Clicca su &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Individual Finals/it|Finali Individuali]]&#039;&#039;&#039; per andare alle pagine di Gestione}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La pianificazione delle Finali Individuali riduce la possibilità di commettere errori e aumenta la facilità di gestione dei risultati, soprattutto se si prevede di utilizzare l&#039;ISK-NG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gestione degli Eventi==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Main-IT.png|thumb|Lista Eventi Individuali]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Impostazioni per le Finali Individuali =&amp;gt; Gestione degli Eventi&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; mostra la lista degli Eventi Individuali.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codice Evento&#039;&#039;&#039;: Codice dell&#039;Evento. Questo è il codice che verrà utilizzato in tutto Ianseo. Si trasforma in un &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;pulsante&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dopo aver salvato per modificare le Divisioni/Classi ed eventualmente le Categorie che possono partecipare a questo evento. (vedi [[#Selezione Divisioni/Classi Evento]])&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Nome Evento&#039;&#039;&#039;: descrizione dell&#039;Evento&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Paralimpico/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: spunta per abilitare l&#039;Evento come Paralimpico&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordine&#039;&#039;&#039;: l&#039;ordine in cui l&#039;Evento sarà in elenco&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gironi Eliminatori&#039;&#039;&#039;: tipo di eliminazioni. Vedi [[#Tipologia di Girone Eliminatorio]]&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punteggi dei match&#039;&#039;&#039;: selezionare il formato dei punteggi per l&#039;evento (sistema cumulativo o sistema a set)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Fase di Partenza&#039;&#039;&#039;: selezionare la prima fase per le griglie di scontri di questo evento. Controllare in [[Participants/it#Statistiche|Statistiche Partecipanti]] per impostare la fase iniziale corretta in base al numero effettivo di partecipanti. Seleziona &amp;quot;--&amp;quot; (nessuna fase iniziale) per creare eventi senza griglie di scontri.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tipologia Bersaglio&#039;&#039;&#039;: seleziona il bersaglio corretto per l&#039;Evento&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ø (cm)&#039;&#039;&#039;: diametro (in cm) del bersaglio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Distanza&#039;&#039;&#039;: Distanza di tiro. Può essere 0 per eventi in cui la distanza varia tra le fasi elimatorie o le volée.&lt;br /&gt;
* Il pulsante &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Crea o Elimina Eventi in base ai partecipanti&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; creerà o eliminerà eventi in base alle Divisioni/Classi non impostate come parte di un evento o eliminerà eventi in cui non sono presenti arcieri idonei.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Selezione Divisioni/Classi Evento===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Code-IT.png|thumb|Divisioni e Classi ammesse]]&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;ammissibilità di Divisioni/Classi e eventualmente Categorie è definita in questa pagina. Selezionare le Div/Classi ammissibili. Le selezioni multiple si effettuano con CTRL+Click. Come impostazione predefinita non esiste il filtro delle Categorie, per poterlo utilizzare deve essere abilitato manualmente.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Gestione Avanzata====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Code-Advanced-IT.png|thumb|Gestione Avanzata Div/Classi]]&lt;br /&gt;
Il pulsante &amp;lt;code class=button&amp;gt;Gestione Avanzata dei Turni&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; apre alcuni campi avanzati. Questi valori sono fondamentali per la corretta creazione dei risultati dell&#039;evento:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Numero di Atleti/Squadre da selezionare&#039;&#039;&#039;: calcolato automaticamente in base alla fase di partenza impostata, può essere modificato per ridurre la selezione solamente affinchè: gli arcieri meglio classificati abbiano un bye&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Rank del primo Atleta/Squadra da selezionare&#039;&#039;&#039;: solitamente &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; per delle griglie di scontro regolare, può essere impostato su un altro valore, ad esempio per gestire gare secondarie con arcieri più in basso in classifica&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;È un evento con medaglie&#039;&#039;&#039;: seleziona se per l&#039;evento ci sarà una premiazione&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Rank finale del vincitore dell&#039;evento&#039;&#039;&#039;: imposta questo valore al primo della rank dopo il termine dell&#039;evento. Dovrebbe essere uguale a &#039;&#039;Rank del primo Atleta&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codice Evento Genitore&#039;&#039;&#039;: Se questo evento è figlio di un altro evento, allora lasciare vuota la selezione della Div/Classe di cui sopra, in quanto gli avversari saranno gli eliminati/vincitori dell&#039;evento genitore.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Seleziona i vincitori dell&#039;evento genitore&#039;&#039;&#039;: se è selezionato un &#039;&#039;Codice Evento Genitore&#039;&#039;, definisce se l&#039;evento sarà popolato dagli eliminati (default) o dai vincitori degli eventi precedenti&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Etichetta 1°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: Etichetta da impostare per il 1° livello di spareggio &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Etichetta 2°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: Etichetta da impostare per il 2° livello di spareggio &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punti usati come 1°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: Punti da utilizzare per il calcolo del 1° livello di spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punti usati come 2°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: Punti da utilizzare per il calcolo del 2° livello di spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Controlla il 1°spareggio nei Parimeriti&#039;&#039;&#039;: Stabilisce se i pareggi dovrebbero essere interrotti dopo il primo spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Controlla il 2°spareggio nei Parimeriti&#039;&#039;&#039;: Stabilisce se i pareggi devono essere interrotti dopo il secondo spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Classifica dopo la distanza seguente&#039;&#039;&#039;: Solitamente impostata &amp;quot;Ultima&amp;quot;, può essere modificata per adattarsi alle esigenze specifiche del formato di gara&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Categoria WA&#039;&#039;&#039;: Equivalenza tra l&#039;evento e la Div/Classe WA, se presente.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Tipologia di Girone Eliminatorio===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-Type-IT.png|thumb|Tipologie di Girone Eliminatorio]]&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;impostazione predefinita è “Griglie Standard”, ma può essere modificata con altre tipologie di eliminazione.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=error|text=La modifica di questo valore eliminerà completamente i riferimenti e gli scontri della tipologia di eliminazione precedente, ricreerà tutti gli elementi necessari per gestire i risultati per questa nuova tipologia.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====1(2) Gir.Elim.====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-Field-IT.png|thumb|Impostazione dei turni intermedi dei Gironi Eliminatori]]&lt;br /&gt;
Questo tipo di Eliminazione prevede 1 o 2 turni intermedi prima di inserire nelle griglie degli scontri anche gli arcieri qualificati per le fasi finali di scontri. Alcuni campi devono essere inseriti o verificati per ogni turno:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Arcieri&#039;&#039;&#039;: Numero di arcieri da selezionare&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Volée&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di volée da tirare&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frecce&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di frecce per ciascuna volè&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Shoot Off&#039;&#039;&#039;: Frecce di SO &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Gironi World Games (e World Archery) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-WG-IT.png|thumb|Impostazione gironi dei World Games]]&lt;br /&gt;
Questo tipo di eliminazione prepara 2 o 4 gironi di tiro in cui, dopo la qualificazione, verranno inseriti gli atleti classificati dal 3° in avanti, con (World Games) o senza (World Archery) lo scontro al vertice tra il primo e il secondo classificato. Come al solito, alcuni campi devono essere inseriti o verificati:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Arcieri&#039;&#039;&#039;: Numero di arcieri da selezionare nel girone&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Volée&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di volée da tirare&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frecce&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di frecce per ciascuna volè&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Shoot Off&#039;&#039;&#039;: frecce di SO&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Gironi all&#039;italiana====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Elimination-RR-IT.png|thumb|Impostazione Evento Gironi all&#039;italiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;impostazione generale dei Gironi all&#039;italiana per l&#039;evento richiede solo di impostare il numero di “turni” di scontri di Gironi all&#039;italiana che si terranno fino alla collocazione degli arcieri nelle griglie degli scontri finali (se presenti).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Livelli&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di livelli di gironi all&#039;italiana che si terranno (vedasi [[Round Robin|Gironi all&#039;italiana]] per la configurazione completa)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Numero Arcieri per Piazzola==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Opponents-IT.png|thumb|Impostazioni bersaglio e fase degli scontri]]&lt;br /&gt;
Questa pagina mostra una tabella completa di quanti arcieri per piazzola sono previsti per tutte le fasi dell&#039;evento. Stabilisce inoltre se gli scontri saranno disputati in un&#039;unico turno o in due turni.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Una tendina consente di passare facilmente dall&#039;impostazione &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Individuale&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Squadra&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, così come di passare da &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Avversari per Piazzola&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Gestione frecce per set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frecce per set==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Arrows-IT.png|thumb|Impostazione Frecce e Volée]]&lt;br /&gt;
I campi devono essere controllati, soprattutto quando si creano nuovi eventi. Ogni evento ha 2 linee, una per le fasi “Eliminatorie” (fino agli 1/8 inclusi) e una per le fasi “Finali” (1/4, 1/2, Finale Oro/Bronzo), poiché le volée e le frecce per volée possono cambiare tra le due. I punti blu e verdi mostrano come saranno tirate le fasi.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numeri dei Bersagli==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Targets-IT.png|thumb|Assegnazione Piazzole per le griglie]]&lt;br /&gt;
Selezionare innanzitutto l&#039;evento su cui lavorare. Apparirà una griglia basata sulle selezioni impostate in [[#Numero Arcieri per Piazzola]]: Un campo per entrambi gli avversari se tirano 2 arcieri per piazzola (saranno assegnati come 1A e 1B), un campo per avversario se è stato impostato un arciere per piazzola. Esistono alcune scorciatoie per facilitare l&#039;assegnazione dei bersagli.&lt;br /&gt;
Questa impostazione è obbligatoria in caso di:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK/it|ISK-NG]] è previsto per lo score elettronico&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition/it#Layout_campo_di_gara_delle_finali|Campo di Gara]] stampa per la gestione del campo di gara&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Individual_Finals/it#Scorecard_Printout|Stampa Score Individuali]] con la piazzola successiva già designata in caso di vittoria/sconfitta&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gestione Programma==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Schedule-IT.png|thumb|Programma degli scontri]]&lt;br /&gt;
Come prima, per prima cosa selezionare l&#039;evento su cui lavorare. Apparirà una griglia in cui si possono inserire le informazioni per ogni scontro o globalmente per un&#039;intera fase. Ogni Fase ha in alto i campi per inserire una data (formato giorno-mese-anno), un&#039;ora di inizio e una durata (opzionale) dello scontro. Una volta impostato, cliccando su ‘&#039;Imposta a Tutti’&#039; si riempiranno tutti gli scontri di quella fase con lo stesso valore.&lt;br /&gt;
Dopo aver effettuato la prima programmazione, apparirà un menu a tendina con tutti gli scontri nel programma che sono già stati impostati. Dalla fase successiva viene offerta una scorciatoia per velocizzare il processo: inserendo “+” e il numero di minuti di sfasamento nel campo ‘orario’ ed una durata nel campo ‘Durata scontro (min.)’, cliccando su “Imposta a Tutti” si calcolerà automaticamente l&#039;orario corretto e si compilerà l&#039;intera fase. È anche possibile selezionare un programma già pianificato dal menù a tendina e fare clic su “Imposta su Tutti”.&lt;br /&gt;
Questa impostazione è obbligatoria in caso di:&lt;br /&gt;
* [[ISK/it|ISK-NG Pro/Live]] è previsto per lo score elettronico&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Competition/it#Layout_campo_di_gara_delle_finali|Campo di Gara]] stampa per la gestione del campo di gara&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sessioni di Riscaldamento==&lt;br /&gt;
Vedasi [[Competition/Warm_Up_Schedule/it|Torneo/Sessioni di Riscaldamento]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Gestisci gli eventi &amp;quot;Running&amp;quot;==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Running-Events-IT.png|thumb|Gestione degli eventi &amp;quot;Running&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
A volte la raccolta dei punteggi (manuale o elettronica) non è alla stessa volée per tutti: gare con Divisioni/Classi che tirano in più sessioni, HF, 3D, ISK-NG in modalità Lite. Questa pagina è utile perché calcola (e mostra) i risultati come media dei punti freccia fino a 3 decimali.&lt;br /&gt;
La prima colonna di ogni turno mostra il numero più basso e più alto di frecce che è stato tirato per ciascun evento.{{Note|text=È importante avere impostato correttamente [[Participants/it#IRM_Status_Management|IRM Partecipanti]] per avere coerenza con questi numeri}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first column of each Round shows the lowest and highest arrows shot for each event.{{Note|text=It is important to have [[Participants#IRM]] correctly set up in order to have consistency on these numbers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Torneo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/18/en&amp;diff=4547</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Individual Events Setup/18/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/18/en&amp;diff=4547"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:24:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The first column of each Round shows the lowest and highest arrows shot for each event.{{Note|text=It is important to have [[Participants#IRM]] correctly set up in order to have consistency on these numbers}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/15/en&amp;diff=4546</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Individual Events Setup/15/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/15/en&amp;diff=4546"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:24:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Manage Running Events==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Running-Events.png|thumb|Running Events Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes the gathering of scoring (manual or electronic) is not at the same end for everybody: competitions with categories shooting over multiple sessions, Field, 3D, ISK-NG in lite mode. This pages comes in handy as it calculates (and shows) results as average arrow points up to 3 decimals.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/10/en&amp;diff=4545</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Individual Events Setup/10/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Individual_Events_Setup/10/en&amp;diff=4545"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:24:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Archers on Targets==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Individual-Opponents.png|thumb|Target and Phase Opponents Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page shows a comprehensive table of how many archers per target are set for all the phases of the event. It also establishes if matches will be shot in a single wave or in two waves.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=A selector enables an easy switch between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Individual&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Team&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; setup, as well as switch between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Opponents per Target&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Manage Phase&#039;s Arrows per Set&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Participants/Target/en&amp;diff=4543</id>
		<title>Participants/Target/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Participants/Target/en&amp;diff=4543"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Target Assignment is an essential task in competition management.&lt;br /&gt;
Theses pages are for Qualification only: for other stages of the competition please refer to the correct page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Errors in the fields (overlapping target assignments) will be highlighted in red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manual Assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Manual.png|thumb|Manual Target Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manual assignment is pretty forward: for each athlete, you select the session and write the target position. Targets will be automatically left-padded with &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; and the letter automatically switched to uppercase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Based on the [[Competition/Edit_Competition_Info#Top_part:_Session_definition | number of archers per butt]], you can assign up to the corresponding letter: if 4 archers per target letters are A-D, if 8 archers per target letters are A-H, etc. The maximum number of archers per target is 26 and maximum number of target is 999 per session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Select Session&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; number, the list only shows the not already assigned archers and the selected session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Division/Class filter&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is also available: wildcards are &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; (percent) to mean any sequence of characters and &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; (underscore) to mean exactly one character.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draw ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Draw.png|thumb|Automatic Target Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
The automatic draw is very powerful and assigns archers randomly on the defined targets, grouping them in ranges of targets by target type and distance. Each range can group archers by division, category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Automatic draw will take care of leaving &amp;quot;vertical&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;horiziontal&amp;quot; free spots on the line based on the &amp;quot;Wheelchair&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Crossbow&amp;quot; flags assigned to the archer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The draw will try as much as possible to put people from the same club in adjacent targets depending on the draw type &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Session&#039;&#039;&#039;: from the dropdown select the session to work on&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class&#039;&#039;&#039;: only assign targets to the selected categories. As usual, &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; means any sequence of character and &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; means exactly one character. So &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; will select everybody of that session, &amp;quot;R%&amp;quot; all the categories starting with &amp;quot;R&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;_U21_&amp;quot; all under 21 categories, etc&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Draw Type&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Standard Draw&#039;&#039;&#039;: starting from the biggest club (respect to the other filter options), the draw will assign archers from lower to highest target number, then the second biggest, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Field/3D Draw&#039;&#039;: same as previous, but the system skips a target between 2 archers of the same club to avoid &amp;quot;leaking&amp;quot; of unknown measurements information among club members.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Oris Draw&#039;&#039;: Archers will be assigned setting after each big club a small club, in order to mix individuals inside clubs and not grouped all together at one end of the field&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Oris Draw 2&#039;&#039;: variation of the previous, starting the assignment from bot sides of the selected target range&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Separate Divisions&#039;&#039;&#039;: if more than one division is selected, this flag will group archers on the shooting line by division&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Separate Classes&#039;&#039;&#039;: same as above, for classes&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exclude categories already assigned&#039;&#039;&#039;: this flag will not try to reallocate the already assigned positions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Assign to Targets&#039;&#039;&#039;: until this flag is checked, all assignments are fictional, showing a simulation on how the assignments will be formed. As the assignment is random, the final result might not be the one shown on the previous dry-run.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Targets&#039;&#039;&#039;: target range for the assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Change Assigned Session ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Session-Move.png|thumb|Change Session]]&lt;br /&gt;
Based on the selectors, whole sessions can be moved to another session, eventually only the selected categories.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Move Target Assigned ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Move.png|thumb|Move Target Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows to shift targets up or down inside the same session or move them in a different session.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Target Assignment by Rank ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Rank.png|thumb|Participant Draw By Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
Assigns targets based on the current rank. Useful in certain competitions (Flights, Fields, 3D, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete Target Assignment ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Delete.png|thumb|Delete Target Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Participants]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Participants/Target/it&amp;diff=4542</id>
		<title>Participants/Target/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Participants/Target/it&amp;diff=4542"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;assegnazione piazzole è un compito essenziale nella gestione della competizione.&lt;br /&gt;
Queste pagine si riferiscono solo alla fase di Qualificazione: per le altre fasi della competizione fare riferimento alla pagina corretta.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gli errori nei campi (sovrapposizione di piazzole assegnate) saranno evidenziati in rosso.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assegnazione Manuale ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Manual-IT.png|thumb|Assegnazione Manuale Piazzole]]&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;assegnazione manuale è piuttosto semplice: per ogni atleta si seleziona il turno e si scrive la posizione nella piazzola. Le piazzole saranno automaticamente riempite a sinistra con degli “0” e la lettera cambierà automaticamente in maiuscolo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sulla base del [[Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/it#Parte_superiore:_Definizione_dei_Turni | numero di arcieri per piazzola]] è possibile assegnare anche la lettera corrispondente: se è stato impostato 4 arcieri per piazzola le lettere sono dalla A alla D, se è stato impostato 8 arcieri per piazzola le lettere sono dalla A alla H, ecc. Il numero massimo di arcieri per piazzola è 26 e il numero massimo di piazzole per turno è 999.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cliccando su uno dei numeri a fianco di &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Seleziona un Turno:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; l&#039;elenco mostrerà nelle prime righe gli arcieri con la piazzola non ancora assegnata, e successivamente quelli già assegnati ma che appartengono al turno selezionato.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
È anche disponibile un &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Filtro su Div/Cl:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; i caratteri jolly sono &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; (percento) per indicare qualsiasi sequenza di caratteri e il &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; (trattino basso) per indicare esattamente un carattere.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sorteggio Elettronico ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Draw-IT.png|thumb|Assegnazione Automatica delle Piazzole - Sorteggio]]&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;assegnazione automatica delle piazzole tramite sorteggio è molto potente e assegna gli arcieri in modo casuale sui bersagli definiti, raggruppandoli in itervalli di piazzole per tipologia di bersaglio e distanza. Ogni intervallo può raggruppare gli arcieri per divisione e/o classe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il sorteggio automatico si occuperà di lasciare posti liberi &amp;quot;verticali&amp;quot; o &amp;quot;orizzontali&amp;quot; sulla linea di tiro in base alle spunte su &amp;quot;Sedia a rotelle&amp;quot; e &amp;quot;Balestra&amp;quot; assegnate all&#039;arciere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il sorteggio cercherà il più possibile di mettere persone della stessa società in piazzole adiacenti a seconda del tipo di sorteggio. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Seleziona un Turno&#039;&#039;&#039;: dal menu a tendina selezionare il turno sulla quale lavorare&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtro su Div/Cl&#039;&#039;&#039;: assegna le piazzole solo alle Div/Cl selezionate. Come al solito, &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; significa qualsiasi sequenza di carattere mentre  &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; significa esattamente un carattere. Quindi il &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; selezionerà tutti i partecipanti del turno, &amp;quot;CO%&amp;quot; tutte le Div/Cl che iniziano con &amp;quot;CO&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;__J_&amp;quot; tutti/e gli/le arcieri/e Junior di tutte le Divisioni, ecc&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tipo Sorteggio&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Sorteggio Standard&#039;&#039;&#039;: partendo dalla società più numerosa (diversamente dalle altre opzioni di filtro), il sorteggio standard assegnerà gli arcieri dal numero di piazzola più basso a quello più alto, continuando poi con la seconda società più numerosa, e così via...&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Sorteggio Campagna/3D&#039;&#039;: come il sorteggio precedente, ma il sistema salterà una piazzola tra due arcieri della stessa società per evitare il “passaggio” di informazioni sulle distanze sconosciute tra i membri della stessa società.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Sorteggio ORIS&#039;&#039;: agli arcieri verrà assegnata una piazzola in modo che dopo ogni società/nazione numerosa sia posizionata una società/nazione meno numerosa, in modo da mescolare gli atleti all&#039;interno delle piazzole con le società più numerose e non raggruppare tutti i singoli insieme ad un&#039;estremità del campo.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Sorteggio ORIS 2&#039;&#039;: variante del precedente sorteggio, iniziando l&#039;assegnazione piazzole da entrambi i lati dell&#039;intervallo di piazzole selezionato.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Divisioni separate&#039;&#039;&#039;: se è presente più di una divisione, questa spunta raggrupperà gli arcieri sulla linea di tiro in base alla divisione.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Classi separate&#039;&#039;&#039;: come sopra, ma per le classi&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Escludi Div/Cl già Assegnate&#039;&#039;&#039;: questa spunta permetterà di non riassegnare le piazzole già state assegnate&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Assegna piazzole&#039;&#039;&#039;: finché questa spunta non è selezionata, tutte le assegnazioni sono fittizie, mostrano una simulazione di come si potrebbero formare le assegnazioni piazzole. Poiché l&#039;assegnazione è casuale, il risultato finale potrebbe non essere quello mostrato nella precedente prova generale.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Piazzole&#039;&#039;&#039;: intervallo delle piazzole per l&#039;assegnazione.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cambia Turno Assegnato ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Session-Move-IT.png|thumb|Cambio Turno]]&lt;br /&gt;
In base ai selettori è possibile spostare un intero turno dentro un&#039;altro turno di gara, eventualmente anche solo le Div/Cl selezionate nel filtro.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sposta Piazzole ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Move-IT.png|thumb|Sposta Piazzole]]&lt;br /&gt;
Questa pagina permette di spostare le piazzole verso numeri più alti o verso numeri più bassi all&#039;interno dello stesso turno o di spostarle in un turno diverso.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assegna Piazzole Secondo Classifica ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Rank-IT.png|thumb|Assegna Piazzole Secondo Classifica]]&lt;br /&gt;
Assegna le piazzole in base alla posizione in classifica. Utile in alcune competizioni (Gruppi, Campagna, 3D, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Annulla Assegnazione Piazzole ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Delete-IT.png|thumb|Annulla Assegnazione Piazzole]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Partecipanti]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Participants/Target/sv&amp;diff=4541</id>
		<title>Participants/Target/sv</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Participants/Target/sv&amp;diff=4541"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tavelplacering/patrullindelning är en viktig del i tävlingsadministrationen.&lt;br /&gt;
De här sidorna gäller enbart kvalificeringsronden: för övriga delar i tävlingen, använd därför avsedda sidor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Om något fält blir rött beror detta på att du har överlappande värden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manuell tavelplacering ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Manual.png|thumb|Manual Target Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manuell tilldelning är ganska enkel: Välj omgång och fyll i tavel-/patrullnummer och position(ex 1a). Systemet fyller automatiskt fältet med de uppgifter det behöver, och omvandlar liten bokstav till stor (001A).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Baserat på [[Tävling/Redigera tävlingsinformation#Top_part:_Session_definition | antalet skyttar per tavla]] kan du tilldela upp till motsvarande bokstav: om 4 skyttar per tavla används bokstäverna A–D, om 8 skyttar per tavla används A–H, osv. Maxantalet skyttar per tavla är 26 och maxantalet tavlor per omgång är 999.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
När du klickar på numret vid &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Välj omgång&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; visar listan bara de skyttar som ännu inte har blivit tilldelade samt den valda omgången.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ett &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Skjutstil/klass-filter&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; finns också: jokertecken är &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; (procent) som betyder valfri teckenföljd och &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; (understreck) som betyder exakt ett tecken.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lottning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Draw.png|thumb|Automatisk taveltilldelning]]&lt;br /&gt;
Den automatiska lottningen är mycket kraftfull och tilldelar skyttar slumpmässigt på de definierade tavlorna, grupperade i tavelintervall efter tapettyp och avstånd. Varje intervall kan gruppera skyttar efter skjutstil och kategori.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Den automatiska lottningen ser till att lämna ”vertikala” eller ”horisontella” fria platser på linjen utifrån flaggorna ”Wheelchair” och ”Crossbow” som är satta på skytten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lottningen försöker i möjligaste mån placera personer från samma klubb på intilliggande tavlor, beroende på vald lottningstyp. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Välj omgång&#039;&#039;&#039;: välj i rullgardinsmenyn vilken omgång du vill arbeta med&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtrera på skjutstil/klass&#039;&#039;&#039;: tilldela bara tavlor till de valda kategorierna. Som vanligt betyder &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; valfri teckenföljd och &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; exakt ett tecken. Så &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; väljer alla i den omgången, &amp;quot;R%&amp;quot; alla kategorier som börjar på &amp;quot;R&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;_U21_&amp;quot; alla U21-kategorier, osv.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Lottningstyp&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Standardlottning&#039;&#039;: med start i den största klubben (i förhållande till övriga filterval) tilldelar lottningen skyttar från lägsta till högsta tavlnummer, därefter näst största klubb, osv.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Fält/3D-lottning&#039;&#039;: som ovan, men systemet hoppar över en tavla mellan två skyttar från samma klubb för att undvika att klubbmedlemmar “läcker” okända avstånds-/mätpunkter till varandra.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;ORIS-lottning&#039;&#039;: efter varje stor klubb placeras en mindre klubb, för att blanda skyttar mellan klubbar och undvika att alla från samma klubb hamnar samlade i ena änden av banan.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;ORIS-lottning 2&#039;&#039;: variant av föregående, där tilldelningen startar från båda sidor av det valda tavelintervallet.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Separera skjutstilar&#039;&#039;&#039;: om fler än en skjutstil är vald grupperas skyttarna på skjutlinjen per skjutstil&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Separera klasser&#039;&#039;&#039;: som ovan, fast för klasser&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Uteslut kategorier som redan är tilldelade&#039;&#039;&#039;: försöker inte omfördela redan tilldelade platser&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tilldela till tavlor&#039;&#039;&#039;: tills denna är ikryssad är alla tilldelningar “på låtsas” och visar en simulering av hur tilldelningen skulle bli. Eftersom tilldelningen är slumpmässig kan slutresultatet skilja sig från simuleringen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tavlor&#039;&#039;&#039;: tavelintervall som tilldelningen ska göras inom.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ändra tilldelad omgång ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Session-Move.png|thumb|Change Session]]&lt;br /&gt;
Beroende på hur du fyller i fälten här så kan du flytta hela omgången till en annan omgång, eller bara vissa klasser.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ändra tavelplacering ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Move.png|thumb|Move Target Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
På den här sidan kan du flytta tavlor inom eller till en annan omgång.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tavelplacering efter ranking ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Rank.png|thumb|Participant Draw By Rank]]&lt;br /&gt;
Tilldela tavla/patrull baserat på ranking. Detta är användbart i vissa tävlingar (Flights, Fält, 3D, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ta bort tavelplaceringen ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Participants-Target-Delete.png|thumb|Delete Target Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Kategori:Deltagare]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Innehåll}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Participants/Target/10/en&amp;diff=4540</id>
		<title>Translations:Participants/Target/10/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Participants/Target/10/en&amp;diff=4540"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Session&#039;&#039;&#039;: from the dropdown select the session to work on&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class&#039;&#039;&#039;: only assign targets to the selected categories. As usual, &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; means any sequence of character and &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; means exactly one character. So &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; will select everybody of that session, &amp;quot;R%&amp;quot; all the categories starting with &amp;quot;R&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;_U21_&amp;quot; all under 21 categories, etc&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Draw Type&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Standard Draw&#039;&#039;&#039;: starting from the biggest club (respect to the other filter options), the draw will assign archers from lower to highest target number, then the second biggest, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Field/3D Draw&#039;&#039;: same as previous, but the system skips a target between 2 archers of the same club to avoid &amp;quot;leaking&amp;quot; of unknown measurements information among club members.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Oris Draw&#039;&#039;: Archers will be assigned setting after each big club a small club, in order to mix individuals inside clubs and not grouped all together at one end of the field&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Oris Draw 2&#039;&#039;: variation of the previous, starting the assignment from bot sides of the selected target range&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Separate Divisions&#039;&#039;&#039;: if more than one division is selected, this flag will group archers on the shooting line by division&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Separate Classes&#039;&#039;&#039;: same as above, for classes&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Exclude categories already assigned&#039;&#039;&#039;: this flag will not try to reallocate the already assigned positions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Assign to Targets&#039;&#039;&#039;: until this flag is checked, all assignments are fictional, showing a simulation on how the assignments will be formed. As the assignment is random, the final result might not be the one shown on the previous dry-run.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Targets&#039;&#039;&#039;: target range for the assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/it&amp;diff=4539</id>
		<title>Competition/Edit Competition Info/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/it&amp;diff=4539"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Info Gara ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Info-Edit-IT.png|thumb|Modifica Dati Gara]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Modifica Dati Gara =&amp;gt; Info Gara&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; mostrerà la stessa pagina di [[Competition/it#Creare_una_Gara|Creare una gara]], ma con un campo in più:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tabella di ricerca&#039;&#039;&#039;: Alcune Federazioni hanno deciso di aiutare gli organizzatori consegnando una lista regolarmente aggiornata dei loro arcieri, compresa la loro attuale società/nazione e la divisione di tiro preferita. Nel caso in cui questa tabella di ricerca venga modificata dopo che alcuni atleti sono già stati inseriti, un  pulsante&amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Imposta tutti gli iscritti a: XXX&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; apparirà per allineare tutti gli iscritti a quella tabella di ricerca. La tabella è popolata da [[Participants/Athletes_Sync.|Aggiornamento Arcieri]].&lt;br /&gt;
In fondo alla pagina una serie di link daranno accesso alle impostazioni di base da controllare:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Turno|Gestione dei Turni di Tiro]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Personale_sul_campo|Gestione del Personale sul Campo]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Immagini|Gestione delle Immagini]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Divisioni_e_Classi|Gestione Divisioni e Classi]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Categorie|Gestione Categorie]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Parametri_Avanzati|Parametri Avanzati]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Immagini ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Images-IT.png|thumb|Gestione delle Immagini del Torneo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Modifica Dati Gara =&amp;gt; Immagini&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; porterà a una pagina in cui è possibile inserire i loghi in alto a sinistra, in alto a destra e il banner in basso. I risultati migliori per le immagini in alto a sinistra e a destra si ottengono con loghi quadrati.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il logo della società organizzatrice dovrebbe essere posizionato in alto a destra, mentre il logo del torneo in alto a sinistra.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;immagine in basso è solitamente utilizzata per pubblicizzare sponsor e partner. Verrà ridimensionato a 1 cm di altezza (0,39 pollici), quindi tenetene conto quando create l&#039;immagine in basso. La larghezza dell&#039;immagine in basso per il formato A4 deve essere di 19 cm (7,48 pollici), 20 cm (7,87 pollici) per il formato Letter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I formati accettati sono PNG (preferito per una migliore stampa) e JPG, con una dimensione massima di 256KB.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Ricordate di rimuovere la trasparenza se utilizzate immagini PNG!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Turno ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Modifica dati Gara =&amp;gt; Turno&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; La pagina imposta il numero di turni di tiro e il loro programma. I turni di tiro possono essere uno dopo l&#039;altro (come in molte gare indoor) o simultanei (come in una gara Campagna o 3D con campi multipli) o un mix dei due.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-IT.png|thumb|Gestione dei Turni di Tiro - Parte superiore]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parte superiore: Definizione dei Turni  ===&lt;br /&gt;
Nella parte superiore, dopo aver selezionato il numero di turni (massimo 9), è necessario impostare il numero di battifreccia per turno e di arcieri per piazzola. Se si impostano solo 2 arcieri per piazzola, si può scegliere se tirare “AB” (contemporaneamente) o “AC” (uno per linea) o “AD” (uno per linea su ciascun lato del battifreccia). {{Note|text=Non dimenticate di salvare la configurazione!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Advanced-IT.png|thumb|Gestione Avanzata dei Turni]]&lt;br /&gt;
==== Gestione Avanzata dei Turni ====&lt;br /&gt;
Il link &#039;&#039;&#039;:Gestione Avanzata dei Turni:&#039;&#039;&#039; porta a una pagina in cui è possibile regolare alcuni dettagli per ciascun turno. La pagina principale “Turno” si riferiva alla parte di “Qualificazione” della competizione, mentre nella pagina avanzata la “Gestione Avanzata dei Turni” è più correlata ai momenti di tiro della competizione: qualificazione, gironi eliminatori, scontri, finali, ecc. L&#039;immagine mostra un esempio di Turni di qualificazione e di Turni di scontri. {{Note|text=Non dimenticate di salvare la configurazione!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Bottom.png|thumb|Session Management - Bottom part]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Bottom-IT.png|thumb|Gestione dei Turni di Tiro - Parte inferiore]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parte inferiore: Programma di gara ===&lt;br /&gt;
Nella parte inferiore della pagina, suddivise per ciascun turno e per ciascuna distanza, alcune impostazioni sono obbligatorie:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Volée&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di volée per la distanza&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Frecce/Volée&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di frecce per volée&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gli altri campi sono facoltativi e verranno utilizzati sia per la creazione del Programma di Gara che per il Layout del campo di gara&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Data&#039;&#039;&#039;: data in cui verra svolta la distanza&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Riscaldamento&#039;&#039;&#039;: orario in cui inizierà il riscaldamento&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Durata(min)&#039;&#039;&#039;: durata in minuti del riscaldamento&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ora d&#039;inizio&#039;&#039;&#039;: orario in cui inizierà la distanza&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Durata(min)&#039;&#039;&#039;: durata in minuti della distanza. Se non sono stati impostati valori per le altre distanze, si consideri di inserire qui l&#039;intero tempo delle qualifiche.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Appunti sul programma di gara&#039;&#039;&#039;: commenti che verranno inseriti nel programma&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Le modifiche in questi campi vengono salvate automaticamente lasciando il campo: il valore cambierà in blu o verde per mostrare la modifica}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Avanzato ====&lt;br /&gt;
Facendo clic sul pulsante &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Advanced&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; appariranno altri due campi: &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Volée da tirare&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di volée ancora da tirare in quella distanza: 0 significa tutte&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Spostamento delle volée&#039;&#039;&#039;: Traslazione della volée dalla quale accettare i punteggi: 0 è la prima volée, 1 è la seconda, ecc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Questi campi controllano situazione come, per esempio, un campo di 60 piazzole da tirare in 3 giorni, 20 bersagli al giorno: invece di creare score con 60 righe, è meglio dividere in 3 distanze, la prima distanza che va dal bersaglio 1 al 20 (20 volée da tirare, 0 &amp;quot;spostamento delle volè&amp;quot;), la seconda distanza dal 21 al 40 (20 volée da tirare, 20 &amp;quot;spostamento delle volè&amp;quot;), la terza distanza dal 41 al 60 (20 volée da tirare, 40 &amp;quot;spostamento delle volè&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Personale sul campo ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Officials-IT.png|thumb|Personale sul campo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Modifica Dati Gara =&amp;gt; Personale sul campo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; apre la pagina del Personale di Campo (Giudici di Gara, Commissione di Garanzia, Responsabile dell&#039;Organizzazione, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
Una persona viene aggiunta compilando i seguenti campi:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tessera&#039;&#039;&#039;: il numero di tessera della persona (di solito il suo numero di tessera federale).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Identificativo Locale&#039;&#039;&#039;: l&#039;ID locale della persona, se diverso da quello della tessera.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Cognome&#039;&#039;&#039; e &#039;&#039;&#039;Nome&#039;&#039;&#039;: nome della persona. Se una persona ha solo il patronimico, inserirlo nel campo del Cognome.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sesso&#039;&#039;&#039;: Al momento sono disponibili solo M(maschio) e F(femmina).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Codice Soc.&#039;&#039;&#039;: codice società/nazione. Utilizzare i codici accettati dal CIO se si utilizzano le nazioni.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Società&#039;&#039;&#039;: nome completo della società/paese.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ruolo&#039;&#039;&#039;: funzione all&#039;interno della competizione.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Facendo clic sulla lente d&#039;ingrandimento si aprirà una finestra di ricerca per aggiungere rapidamente nuove persone, se già presenti nel database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In basso sono riportati i PDF del Personale sul Campo. Quello con gli anelli olimpici significa sempre Stampa ORIS di default.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Divisioni e Classi ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Modifica Dati Gara =&amp;gt; Divisioni e Classi&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; mostra una pagina divisa in due sezioni. Queste sono solitamente preimpostate in base al regolamento e alla tipologia di gara.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Divisions-IT.png|thumb|Divisioni nel Torneo]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parte Superiore ===&lt;br /&gt;
Per aggiungere una divisione, inserisci i seguenti campi:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Divisione&#039;&#039;&#039;: un codice fino a 4 caratteri per la divisione: scegliete il codice in modo oculato in quanto viene utilizzato in tutto Ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Descrizione&#039;&#039;&#039;: descrizione della Divisione&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Paralimpico/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: definisce se una divisione è paralimpica o meno&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Atleta&#039;&#039;&#039;: definisce se la divisione è per gli atleti in gara o per il supporto (allenatori, Delegato tecnico, staff, media, ecc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordine&#039;&#039;&#039;: ordine secondo il quale saranno elencate le divisioni &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Classes-IT.png|thumb|Classi del Torneo]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parte Inferiore ===&lt;br /&gt;
Le classi sono gruppi di arcieri sulla base dell&#039;età. A volte, un arciere di un gruppo di età può tirare in un altro gruppo di età, come ad esempio un Allievo (U18) che tira come Junior (U21), o un Master che tira come Senior. L&#039;età è quella che la persona ha al 31 dicembre dell&#039;anno della gara.&lt;br /&gt;
Per aggiungere una classe, inserire i seguenti campi:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Classe di età&#039;&#039;&#039;: codice fino a 4 caratteri per ogni classe: scegliete il codice in modo oculato perché viene utilizzato in tutto Ianseo&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sesso&#039;&#039;&#039;: M(aschile), F(emminile) or U(nica) sono le opzioni disponibili&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Descrizione&#039;&#039;&#039;: descrizione della classe&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Paralimpico/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: definisce se una divisione è paralimpica o meno&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Atleta&#039;&#039;&#039;: definisce se la classe è per gli atleti in gara o per il supporto (allenatori, Delegato tecnico, staff, media, ecc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordine&#039;&#039;&#039;: ordine secondo il quale saranno elencate le divisioni&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Anno Inizio&#039;&#039;&#039;: età minima (inclusa) per essere selezionati in questa classe&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Anno Fine&#039;&#039;&#039;: età massima (inclusa) per essere selezionati in questa classe&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Classi Ammesse&#039;&#039;&#039;: le classi nelle quali questa classe può gareggiare. Un elenco di classi separato da virgole, contenente almeno la classe stessa.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Div. ammesse (vuoto=tutti)&#039;&#039;&#039;: un elenco separato da virgole di divisioni in cui questa classe è disponibile (vuoto se universale)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In fondo alla pagina sono presenti due scorciatoie per:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Gestisci Distanze|Gestisci Distanze]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Categorie|Gestione Categorie]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Categorie ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-SubClasses-IT.png|thumb|Gestione Categorie]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Modifica Dati Gara =&amp;gt; Categorie&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; offre la possibilità di creare una serie di Categorie per classificare ulteriormente una determinata Classe/Divisione in sottogruppi. Di solito si tratta delle &amp;quot;categorie di merito&amp;quot; degli arcieri o dei raggruppamenti.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Gestisci Distanze ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Distances-IT.png|thumb|Gestione Distanze]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Modifica Dati Gara =&amp;gt; Gestisci Distanze&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; mostra la pagina per la gestione delle distanze per ogni Divisione/Classe di atleti.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtro su Div/Cl&#039;&#039;&#039;: questo campo deve essere compilato in modo che nessuna Div/Cl (Divisione e Classe dell&#039;arciere) possa essere scelta da due o più filtri. Alcuni caratteri Jolly possono aiutare a ridurre il numero di righe e a raggruppare alcune Div/Cl che tirano alle stesse distanze:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;_&amp;quot; (trattino basso)&#039;&#039;&#039;: corrisponde esattamente a un singolo carattere, quindi “COS_” corrisponde a “COSM” “COSF” ma non a “COSBM”.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; (percento)&#039;&#039;&#039;: corrisponde a qualsiasi sequenza di caratteri. Il filtro più semplice è un singolo segno “%” che corrisponde a tutte le Div/Cl, se tutte tirano alle stesse distanze. “C%” corrisponde a tutte le Div/Cl che iniziano con la “C”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;.1., .2., .3.&#039;&#039;&#039;: per ogni distanza, inserisci il nome specifico di quella distanza. Ad esempio: “18m-1”, ‘Hunter’, “Field”,...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Se hai improvvisamente duplicato gli arcieri per una data Div/Cl, molto probabilmente ci saranno definizioni sovrapposte nel filtro: modificarle per rimuovere l&#039;incongruenza.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nella parte inferiore della pagina è presente un promemoria modificabile per il [[#Parte_inferiore:_Programma_di_gara|Programma di gara]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Gestisci Bersagli ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Targetfaces-IT.png|thumb|Gestione dei Bersagli]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Torneo =&amp;gt; Modifica Dati Gara =&amp;gt; Gestisci Bersagli&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; consente di definire i bersagli (Default e opzionali) per le Div/Cl e le distanze. {{Note|type=warning|text=Si sconsiglia di modificare i valori predefiniti.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Nome&#039;&#039;&#039;: Nome della tipologia di bersaglio. Una volta salvato, modificando la riga del bersaglio apparirà un ingranaggio, cliccando sul quale si aprirà una sottomaschera in cui si potranno definire alcuni elementi diversi dai valori generali (impostati nei [[#Parametri Avanzati|Parametri Avanzati]]):&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Etichetta 1°spareggio&#039;&#039;: come chiamare gli Ori (primo spareggio). Solitamente i &amp;quot;10+X&amp;quot; nelle gare targa e i &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; nelle gare indoor.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Etichetta 2°spareggio&#039;&#039;: come chiamare gli X/Nove (secondo livello di spareggio). Solitamente le &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; nelle gare targa e i &amp;quot;9&amp;quot; nelle gare indoor.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Punti usati come 1°spareggio&#039;&#039;: Punti utilizzati come Ori (primo livello di spareggio). Solitamente X,10 nelle gare targa, 10 nelle gare indoor.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Punti usati come 2°spareggio&#039;&#039;: Punti utilizzati come X/Nove (secondo livello di spareggio). Solitamente X nelle gare targa, 9 nelle gare indoor.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtro su Div/Cl&#039;&#039;&#039;: Questo filtro è la combinazione di Divisione e Classe per abbinare la Div/Cl dell&#039;atleta. Due caratteri possono essere utilizzati come Jolly:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;_&amp;quot; (trattino basso)&#039;&#039;: corrisponde esattamente a un singolo carattere. Quindi “CO_M” corrisponde a “COSM” “COMM” “COJM” “COAM” “CORM” “COGM” ma non a “COSMM”.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; (percento)&#039;&#039;: corrisponde a qualsiasi sequenza di caratteri. Il filtro più semplice è un singolo segno “%” che corrisponde a tutte le Div/Cl. &amp;quot;AN%&amp;quot; corrisponderà a &amp;quot;ANSM&amp;quot; ma anche a &amp;quot;ANMM&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;ANMF&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;ANJM&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;ANJF&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;ANAM&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;ANAF&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;ANRM&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;ANRF&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;ANGM&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;ANGF&amp;quot;, ma non a &amp;quot;ARSF&amp;quot; o a &amp;quot;COSM&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtro su Div/Cl (RegExp)&#039;&#039;&#039;: questo campo è riservato agli utenti avanzati e permette di utilizzare [[https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.4/en/regexp.html#regexp-syntax|REGEXP]] (Regular Expressions) per abbinare in modo più dettagliato più Div/Cl contemporaneamente&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;.1., .2., .3., ...&#039;&#039;&#039;: Per ogni distanza, è possibile selezionare un tipo di bersaglio e un diametro. Dopo aver salvato una nuova riga, al momento della sua modifica appare un ingranaggio, per specificare più dettagliatamente i 2 punteggi usati per gli spareggi che potrebbero essere definiti se diversi dai valori generali (impostati nei [[#Parametri Avanzati|Parametri Avanzati]]) o i valori specifici del Bersaglio.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Imposta come predefinito&#039;&#039;&#039;: Selezionare per definire questo bersaglio come bersaglio predefinito per le Div/Cl selezionate dal filtro.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=La stessa Div/Cl può essere selezionata da più di un filtro, consentendo all&#039;arciere di scegliere tra più tipologie di bersaglio, ad esempio nell&#039;indoor tra bersaglio completo o ridotto (tripla)}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Parametri Avanzati ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Advanced-IT.png|thumb|Parametri Avanzati]]&lt;br /&gt;
Questa pagina non viene citata nel menù, poiché le impostazioni sono critiche e una volta impostate non devono essere manomesse. {{Note|type=error|text=Modificate i valori qui presenti solo se sapete cosa state facendo!}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Distanze&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di distanze della fase di qualificazione. Ad esempio, il FITA (1440 Round) ha 4 distanze, mentre i classici Indoor hanno 2 distanze.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Volée&#039;&#039;&#039;: numero di volée (da 3 frecce) per distanza.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punteggio Massimo per la Distanza&#039;&#039;&#039;: Punteggio Massimo per ciascuna Distanza. Il calcolo è basato sulla moltiplicazione di [massimo punteggio nel bersaglio]*[volée]*3&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punteggio Massimo per le finali individuali&#039;&#039;&#039;: punteggio massimo totale in uno scontro individuale&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punteggio Massimo per le finali a squadra&#039;&#039;&#039;: punteggio massimo totale in uno scontro a squadre ([punteggio massimo nel bersaglio]*[volée squadra]*[n°frecce per quadra per volée])&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Categoria Torneo&#039;&#039;&#039;: Tipologia del Torneo&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Modalità Elaborazione Squadre&#039;&#039;&#039;: tipo di composizione della squadra. Valido solo per le “Squadre Standard” e non per le “Squadre per eventi”.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gironi Eliminatori&#039;&#039;&#039;: presenza di un girone eliminatorio individuale tra le qualifiche e gli scontri&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Etichetta 1°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: descrizione del ripiego standard per il 1° livello di spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Etichetta 2°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: descrizione del ripiego standard per il 2° livello di spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punti usati come 1°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: elenco separato da virgole dei punti utilizzati per l&#039;elaborazione del 1° livello di spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Punti usati come 2°spareggio&#039;&#039;&#039;: elenco separato da virgole dei punti utilizzati per l&#039;elaborazione del 2° livello di spareggio&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Doppio&#039;&#039;&#039;: definisce se la gara è doppia o meno, ad esempio Doppio 70/60mt Round - Doppio 50mt Round , 25+18 indoor, ecc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Torneo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/fr&amp;diff=4538</id>
		<title>Competition/Edit Competition Info/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/fr&amp;diff=4538"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Competition Info ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Info-Edit.png|thumb|Edit Competition Info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Competition Info&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will show the same page as the [[Competition#Create_a_Competition|Competition creation page]], but with one field more:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Lookup Table&#039;&#039;&#039;: Some Federations have decided to help organizers delivering a regularly updated list of their archers including their current club/country assignment and preferred category of shooting. In case this lookup table is changed after some athletes are in, a &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set all Entries to: XXX&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button will appear to align all entries to that lookup table. This table is populated by [[Participants/Athletes_Sync.|Athletes Sync.]]&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom of the page, a series of links will open the most basic settings to be checked:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Session|Shooting Session Management]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Competition_Officials|Competition Officials Management]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Images|Image Management]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Divisions_and_Classes|Manage Divisions/Classes]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#SubClasses|Manage SubClasses]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Advanced_Parameters|Advanced Parameters]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Images ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Images.png|thumb|Competition Image Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Images&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will lead to a page where top left and right logos as well as the bottom banner can be uploaded. Best results will be achieved with square logos for top left and right.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Main Institution logos should be placed top right, while the Competition logo should be placed top left.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bottom banner is usually used for advertising sponsors and partners. It will be resized to be 1 cm high (0.39 inches), so take this into account when creating the bottom banner. The width of the bottom banner for A4 should be 19 cm (7.48 inches), 20 cm (7.87 inches) for Letter.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accepted formats are PNG (preferred for better printouts) and JPG, maximum size is 256KB.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Remember to remove transparency if using PNG images!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Session ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Session&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; page sets up the number of shooting sessions and their scheduling. Shooting sessions can be one after the other (like in many indoors) or simultaneous (like in field or 3D with multiple fields) or a mix of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions.png|thumb|Session Management - Top part]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top part: Session definition ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the top part, after selecting the number of sessions (up to 255) and pressing save. You can then set the number of target butts per session and the number of athletes shooting per target butt. {{Note|text=Don&#039;t forget to save your setup!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Advanced.png|thumb|Advanced Session Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
==== Advanced ====&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;:Advanced:&#039;&#039;&#039; link leads to a page where some details of each session can be adjusted. The main &amp;quot;Session&amp;quot; page was referring to the &amp;quot;Qualification&amp;quot; part of the competition, in the advanced page the &amp;quot;session&amp;quot; is more related to the shooting moments of the competition: qualification, elimination rounds, elimination matches, medal matches, etc. The image shows an example of Qualification Sessions and Matches Sessions. {{Note|text=Don&#039;t forget to save your setup!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Bottom.png|thumb|Session Management - Bottom part]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bottom part: Scheduling ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the bottom part of the page, session per session and distance per distance, some settings are mandatory:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ends&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends for the distance&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrows&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of arrows per end&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The other fields are optional and will be used both for Scheduling and for the field layout&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Date&#039;&#039;&#039;: date the distance will be shot&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Warm Up&#039;&#039;&#039;: time when the warmup will start&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Length&#039;&#039;&#039;: duration of the warmup in minutes&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Starting Time&#039;&#039;&#039;: time when the distance will start&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Length&#039;&#039;&#039;: duration of the distance in minutes. If no values are set for the other distances, consider placing the full qualification time here.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Schedule notes&#039;&#039;&#039;: comments that will be put in the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=modifications in these fields are automatically saved leaving the field: the value will change in blue or green to show the change}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Advanced ====&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Advanced&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button two more fields will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ends to Shoot&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends to shoot in that distance: 0 means all&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ends Offset&#039;&#039;&#039;: End offset from which to accept scores: 0 is the first end, 1 is the second, etc&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These fields control situation like, for example, a field of 60 targets to shoot in 3 days, 20 targets per day: instead of creating scorecards with 60 lines, it is better to divide in 3 distances, the first ranging from target 1 to 20 (20 Ends to Shoot, 0 offset), the second distance from 21 to 40 (20 Ends to Shoot, 20 offset), the third distance from 41 to 60 (20 Ends to Shoot, 40 offset),&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Competition Officials ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Officials.png|thumb|Competition Officials]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Competition Officials&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; opens the page of competition officials (Judges, Jury of Appeal, Chairpersons, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
A person is added filling the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Bib&#039;&#039;&#039;: the bib of the person (usually its license number)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Bib&#039;&#039;&#039;: the local ID of the person if different from the bib&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Given name&#039;&#039;&#039;: person name. If a person has only one patronyme, input it in the Family Name field.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gender&#039;&#039;&#039;: At the moment only M(ale) and F(emale) are available&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Country Code&#039;&#039;&#039;: club/country code. Use the IOC accpeted codes if the country.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Country Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: club/country full name&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: function inside the competition&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the lens will show a search popup to select people already in the competition.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom are the PDF of the officials. The one with the Olympic Rings always means Standard ORIS Printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Divisions and Classes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Divisions and Classes&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; shows a page divided in two sections. These are usually preset based on the ruleset and format of the competition.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Divisions.png|thumb|Competition Divisions]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top Part ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a division, input the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Division&#039;&#039;&#039;: up to 4 characters code for the division: choose the code wisely as it is used throughout ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;: description of the division&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if a division is para or not&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Athlete&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if the division is for competing athletes or support (coaches, delegation officials, staff, media, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;: order in which the divisions will be listed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Classes.png|thumb|Competition Classes]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bottom Part ===&lt;br /&gt;
Classes are groups of archers base on age. Sometimes, an archer of one age group can shoot in another age group, as for example a U18 shooting in U21 or in an adult class. Age is the age that the person has by december 31st of the year of the competition&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a class, input the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Age Class&#039;&#039;&#039;: up to 4 characters code for the class: choose the code wisely as it is used throughout ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gender&#039;&#039;&#039;: M(ale), F(emale) or U(nisex) are the available options&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;: description of the class&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if a class is para or not&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Athlete&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if the class is for competing athletes or support (type of coach, delegation officials, staff, media, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;: order in which the classes will be listed&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;From Year&#039;&#039;&#039;: minimum age (included) to be selected in this class&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;To Year&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum age (included) to be selected in this class&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignable Classes&#039;&#039;&#039;: the classes this class allows to switch. A comma based list of classes, containing at least itself.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed Div. (empty for all)&#039;&#039;&#039;: a comma-separated list of divisions where this class is available (empty if universal)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page are two shortcuts for:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Manage Distances|Manage distances]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#SubClasses|Manage SubClasses]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== SubClasses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-SubClasses.png|thumb|Subclass Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; SubClasses&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; offers the possibility to set up a number of subclasses to further rank a given category into sub groups. Usually these are the levels of the archers or the flighting groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage Distances ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Distances.png|thumb|Distance Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Manage Distances&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; shows the distance management for each and every athlete category.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class&#039;&#039;&#039;: this field must be written so that no category (archer&#039;s division and class) can be chosen by two or more filters. Some jolly characters can help reduce the number of rows and group some categories that shoot at the same distance:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;_&amp;quot; (underscore)&#039;&#039;&#039;: this matches exactly one single character, so &amp;quot;OL_&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;OLM&amp;quot; &amp;quot;OLF&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;OLU18&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; (percent)&#039;&#039;&#039;: this matches any sequence of characters. The most basic filter would be a single &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; sign to match all categories, if all shoot at the same distances. &amp;quot;C%&amp;quot; will match all categories starting with &amp;quot;C&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;.1., .2., .3.&#039;&#039;&#039;: for each distance, insert the specific name for that distance. Eg: &amp;quot;18m-1&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Unknown&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Marked&amp;quot;,...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=If you suddenly have duplicate archers for a given category, most likely you have overlapping definitions in the filter: edit them to remove the inconsistency}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom of the page you have again an editable reminder of the [[#Bottom_part:_Scheduling|Sessions scheduling]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage Targets ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Targetfaces.png|thumb|Targetface Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Manage Targets&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; allows the definition of target faces (default and optional) for the categories and distances. {{Note|type=warning|text=It is not recommended to change the default values.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: Name of the target face. Once saved, editing the target definition gears appear, clicking which a subform appears where some items might be defined if different than the global values (set in the [[#Advanced Parameters|Advanced Parameters]]):&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;1st Tie-Breaker Label&#039;&#039;: how to call the Gold (first tie breaker). Usually &amp;quot;10+X&amp;quot; in target archery or &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;2nd Tie Breaker Label&#039;&#039;: how to call the XNines (second level tie breaker). Ususally &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; in target archery and &amp;quot;9&amp;quot; in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Points as 1st Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;: Points to count as the first level tie breaker. Usually X in target, 10 in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Points as 2nd Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;: Points to count as the second level tie breaker. Usually 10 in target, 9 in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class&#039;&#039;&#039;: This filter is the combination of Division and class to match the category of the athlete. Two characters can be used as jolly:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;_&amp;quot; (underscore)&#039;&#039;: matches a single character. So &amp;quot;C_&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;CM&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;CF&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;CMW&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; (percent)&#039;&#039;: matches any number of characters. The most basic filter is &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; that will match every category. &amp;quot;BB%&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;BBM&amp;quot; as well as &amp;quot;BBU21W&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;BW&amp;quot; nor &amp;quot;MBB2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class (RegExp)&#039;&#039;&#039;: this field is restricted to advanced users and allows to use [[https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.4/en/regexp.html#regexp-syntax|REGEXP]] (Regular Expressions) to match more in detail several categories at once&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;.1., .2., .3., ...&#039;&#039;&#039;: For each distance select a target type and a diameter. After saving a target definition, upon editing a gear appears, to specify more in detail the 2 tie breakers that might be defined if different than the global values (set in the [[#Advanced Parameters|Advanced Parameters]]) or the Target face specific values.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Set as default&#039;&#039;&#039;: Check to define this target as the default target for the categories selected by the filter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=The same category can be selected by more than one filter allowing an archer to select among multiple target faces, eg indoors full target or triple }}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Advanced Parameters ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Advanced.png|thumb|Advanced Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page is not referenced in the menu, as the settings are critical and once set must not be tampered with. {{Note|type=error|text=Change the values in here only if you know what you&#039;re doing!}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Distances&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of distances of the qualification round. Eg 1440 Round has 4 distances, standard indoors have 2 distances.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Ends&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends (of 3 arrows) per distance.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Max Distance Score&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum score per distance. Calculated based on the maximum number of arrows * the maximum score for the target face&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Max Individual Final Score&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum score in an individual match&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Max Team Finals Score&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum score in a team match. Calculated based on the maximum number of arrows * the maximum score for the target face&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tournament Category&#039;&#039;&#039;: type of tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Outdoor Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Indoor Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Field Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** 3D Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Other (Use for Run archery, or custom formats) &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Team Elaboration Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;: team composition type. Valid only for &amp;quot;Regular teams&amp;quot; as opposed to &amp;quot;Events Teams&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Standard Team Configuration of 3 Archers of the same Div/Class&lt;br /&gt;
** Field Team Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
** 3D Team configuration&lt;br /&gt;
** No DivClass Teams - Means there will be no Div/Class	Teams generated&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Eliminations&#039;&#039;&#039;: presence of an individual elimination round between qualification and match play.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;1st Tie-Breaker Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: The description for the first level tiebreak - used in the results printouts and scorecards&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;2nd Tie-Breaker Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: The description for the second level tiebreak - again used in results and scorecard printouts&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as 1st Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;&#039;: comma-separated list of arrow values to calculate the first level tiebreak total when arrow values are fed to the system&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as 2nd Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;&#039;: comma-separated list of arrow values used to calculate the second level tiebreak total when arrow values are fed to the system&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Double&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if the competition is a double or not, eg double 70m round, 25+18 indoor, etc&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Competition]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/sv&amp;diff=4537</id>
		<title>Competition/Edit Competition Info/sv</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/sv&amp;diff=4537"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Tävlingsinformation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Info-Edit.png|thumb|Redigera tävlingsinformation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Competition Info&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; visar samma sida som [[Competition#Create_a_Competition|sidan för att skapa en tävling]], men med ett fält till:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Lookup Table&#039;&#039;&#039;: Vissa förbund har valt att hjälpa arrangörer genom att tillhandahålla en regelbundet uppdaterad lista över sina skyttar, inklusive aktuell klubb-/landtillhörighet och föredragen skjutkategori. Om denna lookup-tabell ändras efter att vissa deltagare redan har lagts in, visas en &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Sätt alla anmälningar till: XXX&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;-knapp för att synka alla poster mot lookup-tabellen. Tabellen fylls via [[Deltagare/Synkronisera skyttar|Synkronisera skyttar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Längst ned på sidan finns en serie länkar som öppnar de mest grundläggande inställningarna som bör kontrolleras:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Session|Hantering av omgångar]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Competition_Officials|Hantering av tävlingsfunktionärer]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Images|Bildhantering]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Divisions_and_Classes|Hantera skjutstilar/klasser]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#SubClasses|Hantera subklasser]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Advanced_Parameters|Avancerade parametrar]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Bilder ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Images.png|thumb|Bildhantering för tävlingen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Tävling =&amp;gt; Redigera tävlingsinformation =&amp;gt; Bilder&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; leder till en sida där du kan ange logotyperna uppe till vänster och höger samt banderollen längst ned. Bäst resultat får du med kvadratiska logotyper för övre vänster och höger.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Förbundets logotyp ska placeras uppe till höger, medan tävlingens logotyp ska placeras uppe till vänster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Banderollen längst ned används vanligtvis för att visa sponsorer och partners. Den skalas om till 1 cm i höjd (0,39 tum), så ta hänsyn till detta när du skapar banderollen. Bredden för banderollen längst ned ska vara 19 cm (7,48 tum) för A4, och 20 cm (7,87 tum) för Letter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Godkända format är PNG (föredras för bättre utskrifter) och JPG. Maximal filstorlek är 256 KB.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Kom ihåg att ta bort transparens om du använder PNG-bilder!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Omgång ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Tävling =&amp;gt; Redigera tävlingsinformation =&amp;gt; Omgång&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;-sidan ställer in antalet omgångar och deras schemaläggning. Omgångarna kan ligga efter varandra (som vid många inomhustävlingar), samtidigt (som i fält eller 3D med flera banor), eller som en kombination av båda.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions.png|thumb|Omgångshantering – övre delen]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Övre delen: Omgångsdefinition ===&lt;br /&gt;
I den övre delen, efter att du har valt antal omgångar (upp till 999), behöver du ange antal tavlor per omgång samt antal skyttar per tavla. Om du väljer endast 2 skyttar per tavla kan du välja om de ska skjuta “AB” (samtidigt), “AC” (en per linje) eller “AD” (en per linje på vardera sidan av tavlan). {{Note|text=Glöm inte att spara dina inställningar!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Advanced.png|thumb|Avancerad omgångshantering]]&lt;br /&gt;
==== Avancerat ====&lt;br /&gt;
Länken &#039;&#039;&#039;Avancerat&#039;&#039;&#039; leder till en sida där vissa detaljer för varje omgång kan justeras. Huvudsidan “Omgång” avser den del av tävlingen som gäller **kvalificering**. På den avancerade sidan är “omgång” mer kopplat till tävlingens **skjutmoment**: kvalificering, elimineringsrundor, elimineringsmatcher, medaljmatcher osv. Bilden visar ett exempel med kvalomgångar och matchomgångar. {{Note|text=Glöm inte att spara dina inställningar!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Bottom.png|thumb|Session Management - Bottom part]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Bottom.png|thumb|Omgångshantering – nedre delen]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Nedre delen: Schemaläggning ===&lt;br /&gt;
I den nedre delen av sidan, omgång för omgång och avstånd för avstånd, finns vissa inställningar som är obligatoriska:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Serier&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal serier för avståndet&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Pilar&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal pilar per serie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De andra fälten är valfria och används både för schemaläggning och för ban-/fältlayouten:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Datum&#039;&#039;&#039;: datum då avståndet ska skjutas&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Uppvärmning&#039;&#039;&#039;: tid då uppvärmningen startar&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Längd&#039;&#039;&#039;: uppvärmningens längd i minuter&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Starttid&#039;&#039;&#039;: tid då avståndet startar&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Längd&#039;&#039;&#039;: avståndets längd i minuter. Om inga värden anges för de andra avstånden, överväg att lägga hela kvaltiden här.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Schemanoteringar&#039;&#039;&#039;: kommentarer som visas i schemat&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Ändringar i dessa fält sparas automatiskt när du lämnar fältet: värdet blir blått eller grönt för att visa att det har ändrats}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Avancerat ====&lt;br /&gt;
När du klickar på knappen &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Avancerat&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; visas ytterligare två fält:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Serier att skjuta&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal serier som ska skjutas på det avståndet: 0 betyder alla&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Serie-offset&#039;&#039;&#039;: från vilken serie poäng ska accepteras: 0 är första serien, 1 är andra, osv.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De här fälten styr upplägg som till exempel en fältrunda med 60 mål som skjuts över 3 dagar, 20 mål per dag. I stället för att skapa ett scorekort med 60 rader är det bättre att dela upp i 3 “avstånd”, där:&lt;br /&gt;
Avstånd 1: mål 1–20 (20 Serier att skjuta, offset 0)&lt;br /&gt;
Avstånd 2: mål 21–40 (20 Serier att skjuta, offset 20)&lt;br /&gt;
Avstånd 3: mål 41–60 (20 Serier att skjuta, offset 40)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tävlingsfunktionärer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Officials.png|thumb|Tävlingsfunktionärer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Tävling =&amp;gt; Redigera tävlingsinformation =&amp;gt; Tävlingsfunktionärer&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; öppnar sidan för tävlingsfunktionärer (domare, överdomarnämnd/Jury of Appeal, ordförande, m.fl.).&lt;br /&gt;
En person läggs till genom att fylla i följande fält:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Bib&#039;&#039;&#039;: personens bib (oftast licensnumret)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Bib&#039;&#039;&#039;: personens lokala ID om det skiljer sig från bib&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039;&#039; och &#039;&#039;&#039;Given name&#039;&#039;&#039;: personens namn. Om personen bara har ett patronymikon, ange det i fältet Family Name.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gender&#039;&#039;&#039;: för närvarande finns bara M(ale) och F(emale)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Country Code&#039;&#039;&#039;: klubb-/landkod. Använd IOC-godkända landskoder för land.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Country Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: klubbens/landets fullständiga namn&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: funktion/roll i tävlingen&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
När du klickar på förstoringsglaset visas en sökruta där du kan välja personer som redan finns registrerade i tävlingen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Längst ned finns PDF-utskrifter för funktionärerna. Den med de olympiska ringarna betyder alltid Standard ORIS Printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Skjutstilar och klasser ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Tävling =&amp;gt; Redigera tävlingsinformation =&amp;gt; Skjutstilar och klasser&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; visar en sida som är uppdelad i två sektioner. Dessa är vanligtvis förinställda utifrån tävlingens regelverk och format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Divisions.png|thumb|Skjutstilar]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Övre delen ===&lt;br /&gt;
För att lägga in en skjutstil, fyll i följande fält:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Skjutstil&#039;&#039;&#039;: kod för skjutstilen, upp till 4 tecken. Välj koden med omsorg – den används i hela ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Beskrivning&#039;&#039;&#039;: beskrivning av skjutstilen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om skjutstilen är para eller inte&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Skytt&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om skjutstilen gäller tävlande skyttar eller stödroller (tränare, delegationsfunktionärer, personal, media, osv.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordning&#039;&#039;&#039;: i vilken ordning skjutstilarna listas&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Classes.png|thumb|Klasser]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Nedre delen ===&lt;br /&gt;
Klasser är grupper av skyttar baserat på ålder. Ibland kan en skytt från en åldersklass skjuta i en annan åldersklass, till exempel en U18 som skjuter i U21 eller i en seniorklass. Ålder avser den ålder personen har den 31 december tävlingsåret.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
För att lägga in en klass, fyll i följande fält:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Åldersklass&#039;&#039;&#039;: kod för klassen, upp till 4 tecken. Välj koden med omsorg – den används i hela ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Kön&#039;&#039;&#039;: M(ale), F(emale) eller U(nisex) är de valbara alternativen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Beskrivning&#039;&#039;&#039;: beskrivning av klassen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om klassen är para eller inte&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Skytt&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om klassen gäller tävlande skyttar eller stödroller (typ av tränare, delegationsfunktionärer, personal, media, osv.)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ordning&#039;&#039;&#039;: i vilken ordning klasserna listas&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Från år&#039;&#039;&#039;: minimiålder (inkl.) för att kunna väljas i klassen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Till år&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximiålder (inkl.) för att kunna väljas i klassen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tillåtna klasser&#039;&#039;&#039;: klasser som denna klass tillåter byte till. En kommaseparerad lista med klasser, som minst innehåller klassen själv.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tillåtna skjutstilar (tomt = alla)&#039;&#039;&#039;: en kommaseparerad lista över skjutstilar där denna klass är tillgänglig (tomt om den gäller för alla)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Längst ned på sidan finns två genvägar till:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Manage Distances|Hantera avstånd]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#SubClasses|Hantera underklasser]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subklasser ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-SubClasses.png|thumb|Hantering av subklasser]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Tävling =&amp;gt; Redigera tävlingsinformation =&amp;gt; Subklasser&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ger möjlighet att skapa ett antal subklasser för att dela upp en viss kategori i undergrupper. Vanligtvis används detta för skyttarnas nivåer eller för flight-/skjutgrupper.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Hantera avstånd ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Distances.png|thumb|Avståndshantering]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Tävling =&amp;gt; Redigera tävlingsinformation =&amp;gt; Hantera avstånd&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; visar avståndshanteringen för varje klass.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Filtrera på skjutstil/klass&#039;&#039;&#039;: detta fält måste skrivas så att ingen kategori (skyttens skjutstil och klass) kan väljas av två eller fler filter. Vissa jokertecken kan hjälpa till att minska antalet rader och gruppera kategorier som skjuter på samma avstånd:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;&amp;quot; (understreck)&#039;&#039;&#039;: matchar exakt ett enda tecken, så &amp;quot;OL&amp;quot; matchar &amp;quot;OLM&amp;quot; och &amp;quot;OLF&amp;quot; men inte &amp;quot;OLU18&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; (procent)&#039;&#039;&#039;: matchar valfri teckenföljd. Det mest grundläggande filtret är ett ensamt &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; som matchar alla kategorier om alla skjuter på samma avstånd. &amp;quot;C%&amp;quot; matchar alla kategorier som börjar med &amp;quot;C&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;.1., .2., .3.&#039;&#039;&#039;: för varje avstånd anger du det specifika namnet för det avståndet, t.ex. &amp;quot;18m-1&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Okänt&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Markerat&amp;quot;, …&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Om du plötsligt får dubbla skyttar i en viss klass beror det oftast på överlappande definitioner i filtret. Redigera filtren så att överlappet försvinner.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Längst ned på sidan finns återigen en redigerbar påminnelse om [[#Bottom_part:_Scheduling|schemaläggning av omgångar]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Hantera tapeter ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Targetfaces.png|thumb|Tapethantering]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Tävling =&amp;gt; Redigera tävlingsinformation =&amp;gt; Hantera tapeter&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; låter dig definiera tapeter (standard och valbara) för olika kategorier och avstånd. {{Note|type=warning|text=Det rekommenderas inte att ändra standardvärdena.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Namn&#039;&#039;&#039;: Tapetens namn. När du har sparat visas ett kugghjul för redigering av tapetdefinitionen. Klickar du på det öppnas ett delformulär där vissa värden kan anges om de skiljer sig från de globala värdena (satts under [[#Advanced Parameters|Avancerade parametrar]]):&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Gold Label&#039;&#039;: benämning för “Gold” (första skiljepilen). Vanligtvis &amp;quot;10+X&amp;quot; i tavelskytte eller &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; inomhus&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;XNine Label&#039;&#039;: benämning för XNines (andra skiljenivån). Vanligtvis &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; i tavelskytte och &amp;quot;9&amp;quot; inomhus&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Points as Gold&#039;&#039;: vilka poäng som räknas som Golds (första skiljenivån). Vanligtvis X,10 i tavelskytte, 10 inomhus&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Points as XNine&#039;&#039;: vilka poäng som räknas som XNine (andra skiljenivån). Vanligtvis X i tavelskytte, 9 inomhus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtrera på skjutstil/klass&#039;&#039;&#039;: filtret är en kombination av skjutstil och klass som matchar skyttens kategori. Två jokertecken kan användas:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;_&amp;quot; (understreck)&#039;&#039;: matchar exakt ett tecken. Så &amp;quot;C_&amp;quot; matchar &amp;quot;CM&amp;quot; och &amp;quot;CF&amp;quot; men inte &amp;quot;CMW&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; (procent)&#039;&#039;: matchar valfritt antal tecken. Det mest grundläggande filtret är &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; som matchar alla kategorier. &amp;quot;BB%&amp;quot; matchar &amp;quot;BBM&amp;quot; och &amp;quot;BBU21W&amp;quot; men inte &amp;quot;BW&amp;quot; eller &amp;quot;MBB2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtrera på skjutstil/klass (RegExp)&#039;&#039;&#039;: detta fält är för avancerade användare och låter dig använda [[https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.4/en/regexp.html#regexp-syntax|REGEXP]] (reguljära uttryck) för att matcha flera kategorier mer detaljerat&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;.1., .2., .3., ...&#039;&#039;&#039;: för varje avstånd väljer du **tapettyp** och **diameter**. Efter att du sparat en tapetdefinition visas ett kugghjul vid redigering, där du kan specificera de två skiljepunkterna mer i detalj om de ska skilja sig från de globala värdena (satts under [[#Advanced Parameters|Avancerade parametrar]]) eller tapetspecifika värden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Sätt som standard&#039;&#039;&#039;: markera för att göra denna tapet till standardtapet för de kategorier som matchas av filtret&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=Samma kategori kan väljas av fler än ett filter, vilket gör att en skytt kan välja mellan flera tapeter, t.ex. inomhus hel tavla eller trippel.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Avancerade inställningar ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Advanced.png|thumb|Avancerade parametrar]]&lt;br /&gt;
Den här sidan finns inte i menyn, eftersom inställningarna är kritiska och när de väl är satta ska de inte ändras. {{Note|type=error|text=Ändra bara värdena här om du vet exakt vad du gör!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Avstånd&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal avstånd i kvalomgången. Exempel: en 1440-rond har 4 avstånd, standard inomhus har 2 avstånd.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Serier&#039;&#039;&#039;: antal serier (om 3 pilar) per avstånd.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Maxpoäng per avstånd&#039;&#039;&#039;: maxpoäng per avstånd. Beräknas som [maxpoäng per tavla]*[serier]*3&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Maxpoäng individuell final&#039;&#039;&#039;: maxpoäng i en individuell match&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Maxpoäng lagfinal&#039;&#039;&#039;: maxpoäng i en lagmatch ([maxpoäng per tavla]*[lagserier]*[lagpilar per serie])&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Turneringskategori&#039;&#039;&#039;: typ av turnering&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Laguträkningsläge&#039;&#039;&#039;: hur lag sätts samman. Gäller endast för “Regular teams” i motsats till “Events Teams”&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Elimineringar&#039;&#039;&#039;: om en individuell elimineringsrunda finns mellan kval och matcher&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gold Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: global standardbenämning för första nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;XNine Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: global standardbenämning för andra nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as Gold&#039;&#039;&#039;: kommaseparerad lista över poäng som används för första nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as XNine&#039;&#039;&#039;: kommaseparerad lista över poäng som används för andra nivån av särskiljning&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Double&#039;&#039;&#039;: anger om tävlingen är “double” eller inte, t.ex. double 70 m-rond, 25+18 inomhus, osv.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Kategori:Tävling]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Innehåll&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/en&amp;diff=4536</id>
		<title>Competition/Edit Competition Info/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/en&amp;diff=4536"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Competition Info ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Info-Edit.png|thumb|Edit Competition Info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Competition Info&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will show the same page as the [[Competition#Create_a_Competition|Competition creation page]], but with one field more:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Lookup Table&#039;&#039;&#039;: Some Federations have decided to help organizers delivering a regularly updated list of their archers including their current club/country assignment and preferred category of shooting. In case this lookup table is changed after some athletes are in, a &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Set all Entries to: XXX&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button will appear to align all entries to that lookup table. This table is populated by [[Participants/Athletes_Sync.|Athletes Sync.]]&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom of the page, a series of links will open the most basic settings to be checked:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Session|Shooting Session Management]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Competition_Officials|Competition Officials Management]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Images|Image Management]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Divisions_and_Classes|Manage Divisions/Classes]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#SubClasses|Manage SubClasses]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Advanced_Parameters|Advanced Parameters]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Images ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Images.png|thumb|Competition Image Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Images&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will lead to a page where top left and right logos as well as the bottom banner can be uploaded. Best results will be achieved with square logos for top left and right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Main Institution logos should be placed top right, while the Competition logo should be placed top left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bottom banner is usually used for advertising sponsors and partners. It will be resized to be 1 cm high (0.39 inches), so take this into account when creating the bottom banner. The width of the bottom banner for A4 should be 19 cm (7.48 inches), 20 cm (7.87 inches) for Letter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accepted formats are PNG (preferred for better printouts) and JPG, maximum size is 256KB.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=Remember to remove transparency if using PNG images!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Session ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Session&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; page sets up the number of shooting sessions and their scheduling. Shooting sessions can be one after the other (like in many indoors) or simultaneous (like in field or 3D with multiple fields) or a mix of them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions.png|thumb|Session Management - Top part]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top part: Session definition ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the top part, after selecting the number of sessions (up to 255) and pressing save. You can then set the number of target butts per session and the number of athletes shooting per target butt. {{Note|text=Don&#039;t forget to save your setup!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Advanced.png|thumb|Advanced Session Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
==== Advanced ====&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;:Advanced:&#039;&#039;&#039; link leads to a page where some details of each session can be adjusted. The main &amp;quot;Session&amp;quot; page was referring to the &amp;quot;Qualification&amp;quot; part of the competition, in the advanced page the &amp;quot;session&amp;quot; is more related to the shooting moments of the competition: qualification, elimination rounds, elimination matches, medal matches, etc. The image shows an example of Qualification Sessions and Matches Sessions. {{Note|text=Don&#039;t forget to save your setup!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Bottom.png|thumb|Session Management - Bottom part]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bottom part: Scheduling ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the bottom part of the page, session per session and distance per distance, some settings are mandatory:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ends&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends for the distance&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrows&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of arrows per end&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other fields are optional and will be used both for Scheduling and for the field layout&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Date&#039;&#039;&#039;: date the distance will be shot&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Warm Up&#039;&#039;&#039;: time when the warmup will start&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Length&#039;&#039;&#039;: duration of the warmup in minutes&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Starting Time&#039;&#039;&#039;: time when the distance will start&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Length&#039;&#039;&#039;: duration of the distance in minutes. If no values are set for the other distances, consider placing the full qualification time here.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Schedule notes&#039;&#039;&#039;: comments that will be put in the schedule&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|text=modifications in these fields are automatically saved leaving the field: the value will change in blue or green to show the change}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Advanced ====&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the &amp;lt;code class=&amp;quot;button&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Advanced&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; button two more fields will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ends to Shoot&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends to shoot in that distance: 0 means all&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ends Offset&#039;&#039;&#039;: End offset from which to accept scores: 0 is the first end, 1 is the second, etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These fields control situation like, for example, a field of 60 targets to shoot in 3 days, 20 targets per day: instead of creating scorecards with 60 lines, it is better to divide in 3 distances, the first ranging from target 1 to 20 (20 Ends to Shoot, 0 offset), the second distance from 21 to 40 (20 Ends to Shoot, 20 offset), the third distance from 41 to 60 (20 Ends to Shoot, 40 offset),&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Competition Officials ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Officials.png|thumb|Competition Officials]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Competition Officials&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; opens the page of competition officials (Judges, Jury of Appeal, Chairpersons, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
A person is added filling the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Bib&#039;&#039;&#039;: the bib of the person (usually its license number)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Local Bib&#039;&#039;&#039;: the local ID of the person if different from the bib&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Family Name&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Given name&#039;&#039;&#039;: person name. If a person has only one patronyme, input it in the Family Name field.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gender&#039;&#039;&#039;: At the moment only M(ale) and F(emale) are available&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Country Code&#039;&#039;&#039;: club/country code. Use the IOC accpeted codes if the country.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Country Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: club/country full name&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Type&#039;&#039;&#039;: function inside the competition&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the lens will show a search popup to select people already in the competition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom are the PDF of the officials. The one with the Olympic Rings always means Standard ORIS Printout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Divisions and Classes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Divisions and Classes&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; shows a page divided in two sections. These are usually preset based on the ruleset and format of the competition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Divisions.png|thumb|Competition Divisions]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top Part ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a division, input the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Division&#039;&#039;&#039;: up to 4 characters code for the division: choose the code wisely as it is used throughout ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;: description of the division&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if a division is para or not&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Athlete&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if the division is for competing athletes or support (coaches, delegation officials, staff, media, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;: order in which the divisions will be listed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Classes.png|thumb|Competition Classes]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bottom Part ===&lt;br /&gt;
Classes are groups of archers base on age. Sometimes, an archer of one age group can shoot in another age group, as for example a U18 shooting in U21 or in an adult class. Age is the age that the person has by december 31st of the year of the competition&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a class, input the following fields:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Age Class&#039;&#039;&#039;: up to 4 characters code for the class: choose the code wisely as it is used throughout ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Gender&#039;&#039;&#039;: M(ale), F(emale) or U(nisex) are the available options&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;: description of the class&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Para/IPC&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if a class is para or not&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Athlete&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if the class is for competing athletes or support (type of coach, delegation officials, staff, media, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;: order in which the classes will be listed&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;From Year&#039;&#039;&#039;: minimum age (included) to be selected in this class&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;To Year&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum age (included) to be selected in this class&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignable Classes&#039;&#039;&#039;: the classes this class allows to switch. A comma based list of classes, containing at least itself.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Allowed Div. (empty for all)&#039;&#039;&#039;: a comma-separated list of divisions where this class is available (empty if universal)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page are two shortcuts for:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#Manage Distances|Manage distances]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[[#SubClasses|Manage SubClasses]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SubClasses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-SubClasses.png|thumb|Subclass Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; SubClasses&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; offers the possibility to set up a number of subclasses to further rank a given category into sub groups. Usually these are the levels of the archers or the flighting groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage Distances ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Distances.png|thumb|Distance Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Manage Distances&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; shows the distance management for each and every athlete category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class&#039;&#039;&#039;: this field must be written so that no category (archer&#039;s division and class) can be chosen by two or more filters. Some jolly characters can help reduce the number of rows and group some categories that shoot at the same distance:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;_&amp;quot; (underscore)&#039;&#039;&#039;: this matches exactly one single character, so &amp;quot;OL_&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;OLM&amp;quot; &amp;quot;OLF&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;OLU18&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; (percent)&#039;&#039;&#039;: this matches any sequence of characters. The most basic filter would be a single &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; sign to match all categories, if all shoot at the same distances. &amp;quot;C%&amp;quot; will match all categories starting with &amp;quot;C&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;.1., .2., .3.&#039;&#039;&#039;: for each distance, insert the specific name for that distance. Eg: &amp;quot;18m-1&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Unknown&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Marked&amp;quot;,...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=If you suddenly have duplicate archers for a given category, most likely you have overlapping definitions in the filter: edit them to remove the inconsistency}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom of the page you have again an editable reminder of the [[#Bottom_part:_Scheduling|Sessions scheduling]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage Targets ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Targetfaces.png|thumb|Targetface Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Manage Targets&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; allows the definition of target faces (default and optional) for the categories and distances. {{Note|type=warning|text=It is not recommended to change the default values.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: Name of the target face. Once saved, editing the target definition gears appear, clicking which a subform appears where some items might be defined if different than the global values (set in the [[#Advanced Parameters|Advanced Parameters]]):&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;1st Tie-Breaker Label&#039;&#039;: how to call the Gold (first tie breaker). Usually &amp;quot;10+X&amp;quot; in target archery or &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;2nd Tie Breaker Label&#039;&#039;: how to call the XNines (second level tie breaker). Ususally &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; in target archery and &amp;quot;9&amp;quot; in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Points as 1st Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;: Points to count as the first level tie breaker. Usually X in target, 10 in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Points as 2nd Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;: Points to count as the second level tie breaker. Usually 10 in target, 9 in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class&#039;&#039;&#039;: This filter is the combination of Division and class to match the category of the athlete. Two characters can be used as jolly:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;_&amp;quot; (underscore)&#039;&#039;: matches a single character. So &amp;quot;C_&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;CM&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;CF&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;CMW&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; (percent)&#039;&#039;: matches any number of characters. The most basic filter is &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; that will match every category. &amp;quot;BB%&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;BBM&amp;quot; as well as &amp;quot;BBU21W&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;BW&amp;quot; nor &amp;quot;MBB2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class (RegExp)&#039;&#039;&#039;: this field is restricted to advanced users and allows to use [[https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.4/en/regexp.html#regexp-syntax|REGEXP]] (Regular Expressions) to match more in detail several categories at once&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;.1., .2., .3., ...&#039;&#039;&#039;: For each distance select a target type and a diameter. After saving a target definition, upon editing a gear appears, to specify more in detail the 2 tie breakers that might be defined if different than the global values (set in the [[#Advanced Parameters|Advanced Parameters]]) or the Target face specific values.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Set as default&#039;&#039;&#039;: Check to define this target as the default target for the categories selected by the filter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|type=reminder|text=The same category can be selected by more than one filter allowing an archer to select among multiple target faces, eg indoors full target or triple }}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Advanced Parameters ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Advanced.png|thumb|Advanced Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page is not referenced in the menu, as the settings are critical and once set must not be tampered with. {{Note|type=error|text=Change the values in here only if you know what you&#039;re doing!}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Distances&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of distances of the qualification round. Eg 1440 Round has 4 distances, standard indoors have 2 distances.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Ends&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends (of 3 arrows) per distance.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Max Distance Score&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum score per distance. Calculated based on the maximum number of arrows * the maximum score for the target face&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Max Individual Final Score&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum score in an individual match&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Max Team Finals Score&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum score in a team match. Calculated based on the maximum number of arrows * the maximum score for the target face&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tournament Category&#039;&#039;&#039;: type of tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Outdoor Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Indoor Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Field Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** 3D Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Other (Use for Run archery, or custom formats) &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Team Elaboration Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;: team composition type. Valid only for &amp;quot;Regular teams&amp;quot; as opposed to &amp;quot;Events Teams&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Standard Team Configuration of 3 Archers of the same Div/Class&lt;br /&gt;
** Field Team Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
** 3D Team configuration&lt;br /&gt;
** No DivClass Teams - Means there will be no Div/Class	Teams generated&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Eliminations&#039;&#039;&#039;: presence of an individual elimination round between qualification and match play.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;1st Tie-Breaker Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: The description for the first level tiebreak - used in the results printouts and scorecards&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;2nd Tie-Breaker Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: The description for the second level tiebreak - again used in results and scorecard printouts&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as 1st Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;&#039;: comma-separated list of arrow values to calculate the first level tiebreak total when arrow values are fed to the system&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as 2nd Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;&#039;: comma-separated list of arrow values used to calculate the second level tiebreak total when arrow values are fed to the system&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Double&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if the competition is a double or not, eg double 70m round, 25+18 indoor, etc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Competition]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/29/en&amp;diff=4535</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Edit Competition Info/29/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/29/en&amp;diff=4535"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Advanced.png|thumb|Advanced Parameters]]&lt;br /&gt;
This page is not referenced in the menu, as the settings are critical and once set must not be tampered with. {{Note|type=error|text=Change the values in here only if you know what you&#039;re doing!}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Distances&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of distances of the qualification round. Eg 1440 Round has 4 distances, standard indoors have 2 distances.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;# Ends&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends (of 3 arrows) per distance.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Max Distance Score&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum score per distance. Calculated based on the maximum number of arrows * the maximum score for the target face&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Max Individual Final Score&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum score in an individual match&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Max Team Finals Score&#039;&#039;&#039;: maximum score in a team match. Calculated based on the maximum number of arrows * the maximum score for the target face&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tournament Category&#039;&#039;&#039;: type of tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Outdoor Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Indoor Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Field Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** 3D Tournament&lt;br /&gt;
** Other (Use for Run archery, or custom formats) &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Team Elaboration Mode&#039;&#039;&#039;: team composition type. Valid only for &amp;quot;Regular teams&amp;quot; as opposed to &amp;quot;Events Teams&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Standard Team Configuration of 3 Archers of the same Div/Class&lt;br /&gt;
** Field Team Configuration&lt;br /&gt;
** 3D Team configuration&lt;br /&gt;
** No DivClass Teams - Means there will be no Div/Class	Teams generated&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Eliminations&#039;&#039;&#039;: presence of an individual elimination round between qualification and match play.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;1st Tie-Breaker Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: The description for the first level tiebreak - used in the results printouts and scorecards&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;2nd Tie-Breaker Label&#039;&#039;&#039;: The description for the second level tiebreak - again used in results and scorecard printouts&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as 1st Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;&#039;: comma-separated list of arrow values to calculate the first level tiebreak total when arrow values are fed to the system&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Points as 2nd Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;&#039;: comma-separated list of arrow values used to calculate the second level tiebreak total when arrow values are fed to the system&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Double&#039;&#039;&#039;: defines if the competition is a double or not, eg double 70m round, 25+18 indoor, etc&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/26/en&amp;diff=4534</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Edit Competition Info/26/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/26/en&amp;diff=4534"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Manage Targets ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nofloat&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Targetfaces.png|thumb|Targetface Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Manage Targets&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; allows the definition of target faces (default and optional) for the categories and distances. {{Note|type=warning|text=It is not recommended to change the default values.}}&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;: Name of the target face. Once saved, editing the target definition gears appear, clicking which a subform appears where some items might be defined if different than the global values (set in the [[#Advanced Parameters|Advanced Parameters]]):&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;1st Tie-Breaker Label&#039;&#039;: how to call the Gold (first tie breaker). Usually &amp;quot;10+X&amp;quot; in target archery or &amp;quot;10&amp;quot; in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;2nd Tie Breaker Label&#039;&#039;: how to call the XNines (second level tie breaker). Ususally &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; in target archery and &amp;quot;9&amp;quot; in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Points as 1st Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;: Points to count as the first level tie breaker. Usually X in target, 10 in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Points as 2nd Tie-Breaker&#039;&#039;: Points to count as the second level tie breaker. Usually 10 in target, 9 in indoors&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class&#039;&#039;&#039;: This filter is the combination of Division and class to match the category of the athlete. Two characters can be used as jolly:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;_&amp;quot; (underscore)&#039;&#039;: matches a single character. So &amp;quot;C_&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;CM&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;CF&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;CMW&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; (percent)&#039;&#039;: matches any number of characters. The most basic filter is &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; that will match every category. &amp;quot;BB%&amp;quot; will match &amp;quot;BBM&amp;quot; as well as &amp;quot;BBU21W&amp;quot; but not &amp;quot;BW&amp;quot; nor &amp;quot;MBB2&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Filter on Division/Class (RegExp)&#039;&#039;&#039;: this field is restricted to advanced users and allows to use [[https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.4/en/regexp.html#regexp-syntax|REGEXP]] (Regular Expressions) to match more in detail several categories at once&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;.1., .2., .3., ...&#039;&#039;&#039;: For each distance select a target type and a diameter. After saving a target definition, upon editing a gear appears, to specify more in detail the 2 tie breakers that might be defined if different than the global values (set in the [[#Advanced Parameters|Advanced Parameters]]) or the Target face specific values.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Set as default&#039;&#039;&#039;: Check to define this target as the default target for the categories selected by the filter&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/10/en&amp;diff=4533</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Edit Competition Info/10/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/10/en&amp;diff=4533"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=== Bottom part: Scheduling ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the bottom part of the page, session per session and distance per distance, some settings are mandatory:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ends&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of ends for the distance&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrows&#039;&#039;&#039;: number of arrows per end&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/32/en&amp;diff=4532</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Edit Competition Info/32/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/32/en&amp;diff=4532"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions-Bottom.png|thumb|Session Management - Bottom part]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/8/en&amp;diff=4531</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Edit Competition Info/8/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/8/en&amp;diff=4531"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;overflow:hidden&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:Competition-Edit-Sessions.png|thumb|Session Management - Top part]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top part: Session definition ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the top part, after selecting the number of sessions (up to 255) and pressing save. You can then set the number of target butts per session and the number of athletes shooting per target butt. {{Note|text=Don&#039;t forget to save your setup!}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/3/en&amp;diff=4530</id>
		<title>Translations:Competition/Edit Competition Info/3/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Competition/Edit_Competition_Info/3/en&amp;diff=4530"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:21:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Images ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Competition-Edit-Images.png|thumb|Competition Image Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Competition =&amp;gt; Edit Competition Info =&amp;gt; Images&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will lead to a page where top left and right logos as well as the bottom banner can be uploaded. Best results will be achieved with square logos for top left and right.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/en&amp;diff=4524</id>
		<title>Ianseo/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/en&amp;diff=4524"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:19:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: what’s that? ==&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo is a software for managing archery tournaments results, created as Open Source program, thanks to the initial support of the Italian Archery Federation ([https://fitarco.it Fitarco]). The Italian Federation then promoted its use to European Countries first, and a few months later i@nseo was used all around the world. After being translated into several languages (more than 30, though its user interface was originally created in Italian), i@nseo has become the world most bleeding edge software for managing archery competitions, the only one that embeds all the rules from World Archery (WA). It constantly evolves, not only to fulfill the new WA requirements, but also to meet the needs of all its stakeholders, from the most important Federations to common users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks to i@nseo, managing an archery competition is made easy, head to tail, starting from accreditations and ending with printed documents, without forgetting the live video displaying of results (TV, Network, YouTube, and so on).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The software is also related to a working group, known as &#039;&#039;i@nseo Team&#039;&#039;, which boasts the best expertise in organizing and managing archery tournaments in the world. After the initial testing process (in the late ‘90s), i@nseo has become the italian official tournament management software in 2006. From that moment on, its creators used it to manage any kind of events in the archery world: Olympic Games, World Championships, European Championships, Grand Prix Rounds, World Games, Universiades, University Championships, World Archery Festivals, and many more, including run archery and Vegas Shoot shows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo as Team is also the official scorer for the Italian Archery Federation, World Archery Europe and several World Archery events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: a unique name ==&lt;br /&gt;
The acronym &#039;&#039;i@nseo&#039;&#039; comes not from the initial of its core group but from some selected letters extracted by its creators’ names, the so-called ‘i@nseo Core Group’:&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039; = Ard&#039;&#039;&#039;i&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ardingo Scarzella)&lt;br /&gt;
 @&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;N&#039;&#039;&#039; = A&#039;&#039;&#039;n&#039;&#039;&#039;drea (Andrea Gabardi)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039; = Chri&#039;&#039;&#039;s&#039;&#039;&#039; (Christian Deligant)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;E&#039;&#039;&#039; = T&#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;o (Matteo Pisani)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039; = Marc&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039; (Marco Carpignano)&lt;br /&gt;
In the last years, some new members, in support of the main team, joined the creators group, helping them during some major events, where accuracy, coordination and organization is needed, creating a team, whose managing skills and organizing expertise are offered and guaranteed worldwide. This manual was originally conceived to give anyone the chance of exploring the program in all its functionalities and to increase the number of its users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ORIS Compliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
ORIS (&#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039;lympic &#039;&#039;&#039;R&#039;&#039;&#039;esults and &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039;nformation &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039;ervices) defines the contents of the results systems for each sport, including Archery. You can see it as a common way to lay lists, rank, results, medals, etc through the sports to ease reporters, media etc to understand what is what and who is who even if they do not have a comprehensive understanding of the sport. Ianseo is ORIS compliant: this means that competition&#039;s output in ORIS format (identified by a modified PDF Icon with the olympic rings in) are adapted from the Olympic and Paralympic Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Club, Country, Team ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Ianseo, Club and Country identify the same thing: a group of people shooting under the same &amp;quot;flag&amp;quot;. If actual countries, ianseo uses the IOC 3 letters country code convention. Clubs can have their own code or numbering sequence, depending on the federation/organiser. Throughout Ianseo the terms Club and Country are interchangeable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Team is ALWAYS created from archers of the same club. This is why there are up to 3 clubs for each archer, allowing to shoot individually for one club but being part of a different club for teams. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Filters in Ianseo ==&lt;br /&gt;
In all the textual filters of ianseo the same convention is used:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; (percent sign): this means any sequence of characters, even none!&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; (underscore): this means exactly one character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; alone on a field will select everything&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RU%&amp;quot; will select all the &amp;quot;Recurve Under&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;_U21_&amp;quot; will select RU21M, RU21W, CU21M, CU21W, BU21M, BU21W but not LBU21&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Categories and Events ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ianseo divide all participants in Divisions and Classes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Division&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Archers&#039;&#039;: it is usually the bow type: Recurve, Compound, Barebow, etc&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Others&#039;&#039;: usually shows the function area: Judge, Official, Media, Guest, etc&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*** &#039;&#039;Archers&#039;&#039;: age class. An archer can be of an age class and decide to shoot in a different class, eg U21 shooting Adult. Classes are usually separate per gender, eg U21M and U21W.&lt;br /&gt;
*** &#039;&#039;Others&#039;&#039;: defines the function type inside the area: eg coach, team manager for Officials; Photographer, TV for Media; VIP, Delegation Official for Guests; etc &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A combination of Division and Class creates a Shooting Category: the results will be shown in the so called &amp;quot;Class and Division&amp;quot; printouts. In these ranking, teams are the traditional 3 persons teams of same category and club/country&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Events are the most powerful tool of Ianseo: one or more categories can be ranked together in a single event, individual or by team: for example, there can be an individual event mixing up all compound archers shooting on a 80cm face at 50m regardless of age and gender, or a team event made up of the best Compound Man, the best Compound Woman, the best 2 Recurve U21 regardless gender. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Based on the elimination type and setup, each event can finish after the qualification round, or lead to brackets, or continue with elimination rounds, round robin, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Credits ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Contributions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Official Pages&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| Language || Contributors&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;6&amp;quot;| [[File:Flag of Great Britain.svg|36px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;6&amp;quot;| English &lt;br /&gt;
| Andy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alessandra&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rob&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Translations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Netherlands.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
| Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of Italy.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Italian&lt;br /&gt;
| Luca&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Paolo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of France.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| French&lt;br /&gt;
| Adrien&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alexandre&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fabien&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Guillaume&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Stéphane&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Sweden.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Swedish&lt;br /&gt;
| Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:I@nseo]][[Category:About us]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/nl&amp;diff=4527</id>
		<title>Ianseo/nl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/nl&amp;diff=4527"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:19:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: wat is het? ==&lt;br /&gt;
I@nseo is een softwareprogramma voor het beheren van resultaten van handboogwedstrijden. Ontworpen als Open Source programma, dankzij de initiële steun van de Italiaanse handboog federatie  ([https://fitarco.it Fitarco]). De Italiaanse handboog federatie heeft het gebruik ervan eerst in Europese landen gepromoot en een paar maanden later werd i@nseo over de hele wereld gebruikt. Na te zijn vertaald in verschillende talen (meer dan 30, hoewel de gebruikersinterface oorspronkelijk in het Italiaans is gemaakt), is i@nseo de meest geavanceerde software ter wereld geworden voor het beheren van boogschietwedstrijden en de enige die alle regels van World Archery (WA) bevat. Het ontwikkelt zich voortdurend, niet alleen om te voldoen aan de nieuwe WA-vereisten, maar ook om te voldoen aan de behoeften van alle belanghebbenden, van de belangrijkste federaties tot de gewone gebruikers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dankzij i@nseo wordt het beheren van een handboogwedstrijd eenvoudiger. Van het begin tot het einde; beginnend bij de accreditaties, eindigend met afgedrukte documenten en waarbij de live videoweergave (TV, Netwerk, YouTube, enzovoort) van resultaten niet vergeten mag worden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het softwareprogramma is ook gerelateerd aan een werkgroep, bekend als het &amp;quot;I@nseo Team&amp;quot;. Het I@nseo Team heeft de professionele expertise in het organiseren en beheren van resultaten van handboogwedstrijden over de wereld. Na een eerste testperiode (eind jaren 1990), werd I@nseo in 2006 het officiële softwareprogramma voor het beheren van resultaten van handboogwedstrijden in Italië. Vanaf dat moment gebruikten de makers het om allerlei evenementen in de boogschietwereld te beheren: Olympische Spelen, Wereldkampioenschappen, Europese Kampioenschappen, Grand Prix rondes, Wereldspelen, Universiades, Universiteitskampioenschappen, Wereld handboog-evenementen,, inclusief runarchery en de Vegas Shoot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Het I@nseo Team is ook de officiële verwerker van de resultaten voor de taliaanse handboog federatie, World Archery Europe en verschillende World Archery evenementen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: een unieke naam ==&lt;br /&gt;
Het acroniem &#039;&#039;i@nseo&#039;&#039; komt niet van de beginletters van de kerngroep, maar van enkele geselecteerde letters uit de namen van de makers, de zgn. ‘i@nseo kerngroep’:&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039; = Ard&#039;&#039;&#039;i&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ardingo Scarzella)&lt;br /&gt;
 @&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;N&#039;&#039;&#039; = A&#039;&#039;&#039;n&#039;&#039;&#039;drea (Andrea Gabardi)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039; = Chri&#039;&#039;&#039;s&#039;&#039;&#039; (Christian Deligant)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;E&#039;&#039;&#039; = T&#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;o (Matteo Pisani)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039; = Marc&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039; (Marco Carpignano)&lt;br /&gt;
In de afgelopen jaren zijn enkele nieuwe leden, ter ondersteuning van het hoofdteam, toegetreden tot de groep van ontwerpers om hen te helpen tijdens enkele grote evenementen, waar nauwkeurigheid, coördinatie en organisatie nodig zijn. Hierdoor is een team ontstaan waarvan de managementvaardigheden en organisatorische expertise wereldwijd worden aangeboden en gegarandeerd. Deze handleiding is oorspronkelijk ontworpen om iedereen de kans te geven het softwareprogramma in al zijn functionaliteiten te verkennen en om het aantal gebruikers te vergroten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== ORIS Compliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
ORIS (&#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039;lympic &#039;&#039;&#039;R&#039;&#039;&#039;esults and &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039;nformation &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039;ervices) defines the contents of the results systems for each sport, including Archery. You can see it as a common way to lay lists, rank, results, medals, etc through the sports to ease reporters, media etc to understand what is what and who is who even if they do not have a comprehensive understanding of the sport. Ianseo is ORIS compliant: this means that competition&#039;s output in ORIS format (identified by a modified PDF Icon with the olympic rings in) are adapted from the Olympic and Paralympic Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Club, Country, Team ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In Ianseo, Club and Country identify the same thing: a group of people shooting under the same &amp;quot;flag&amp;quot;. If actual countries, ianseo uses the IOC 3 letters country code convention. Clubs can have their own code or numbering sequence, depending on the federation/organiser. Throughout Ianseo the terms Club and Country are interchangeable.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A Team is ALWAYS created from archers of the same club. This is why there are up to 3 clubs for each archer, allowing to shoot individually for one club but being part of a different club for teams.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Filters in Ianseo ==&lt;br /&gt;
In all the textual filters of ianseo the same convention is used:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; (percent sign): this means any sequence of characters, even none!&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; (underscore): this means exactly one character.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; alone on a field will select everything&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;RU%&amp;quot; will select all the &amp;quot;Recurve Under&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;_U21_&amp;quot; will select RU21M, RU21W, CU21M, CU21W, BU21M, BU21W but not LBU21&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Categories and Events ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ianseo divide all participants in Divisions and Classes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Division&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Archers&#039;&#039;: it is usually the bow type: Recurve, Compound, Barebow, etc&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Others&#039;&#039;: usually shows the function area: Judge, Official, Media, Guest, etc&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*** &#039;&#039;Archers&#039;&#039;: age class. An archer can be of an age class and decide to shoot in a different class, eg U21 shooting Adult. Classes are usually separate per gender, eg U21M and U21W.&lt;br /&gt;
*** &#039;&#039;Others&#039;&#039;: defines the function type inside the area: eg coach, team manager for Officials; Photographer, TV for Media; VIP, Delegation Official for Guests; etc&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A combination of Division and Class creates a Shooting Category: the results will be shown in the so called &amp;quot;Class and Division&amp;quot; printouts. In these ranking, teams are the traditional 3 persons teams of same category and club/country&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Events are the most powerful tool of Ianseo: one or more categories can be ranked together in a single event, individual or by team: for example, there can be an individual event mixing up all compound archers shooting on a 80cm face at 50m regardless of age and gender, or a team event made up of the best Compound Man, the best Compound Woman, the best 2 Recurve U21 regardless gender.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Based on the elimination type and setup, each event can finish after the qualification round, or lead to brackets, or continue with elimination rounds, round robin, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Credits ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Contributions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Official Pages&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| Language || Contributors&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;6&amp;quot;| [[File:Flag of Great Britain.svg|36px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;6&amp;quot;| English &lt;br /&gt;
| Andy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alessandra&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rob&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Translations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Netherlands.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
| Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of Italy.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Italian&lt;br /&gt;
| Luca&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Paolo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of France.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| French&lt;br /&gt;
| Adrien&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alexandre&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fabien&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Guillaume&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Stéphane&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Sweden.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Swedish&lt;br /&gt;
| Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:I@nseo]][[Category:About us]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/sv&amp;diff=4528</id>
		<title>Ianseo/sv</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/sv&amp;diff=4528"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:19:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: vad är det? ==&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo är ett program för hantering av tävlingsresultat, skapad som Open Source program, tack vare den Italienska bågskytte federationen.  ([https://fitarco.it Fitarco]). Det italienska förbundet uppmuntrade sedan andra europeiska förbund att använda i@nseo, och ganska snart användes programmet i ett stort antal länder runt om i världen. Snart var programmet översatt till flera olika språk (mer än 30) Trots att programmets användargränssnitt ursprungligen skapats på italienska så hade i@nseo blivit världens mest avancerade program för administration av bågskyttetävlingar, det enda som innehåller alla regler från World Archery (WA). I@nseo är under ständig utveckling, inte bara för att möta nya krav ifrån WA, utan även för att tillgodose behov hos alla olika intressenter, allt från de viktigaste förbunden till vanliga användare.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tack vare i@nseo så har det blivit enkelt att hantera en tävling, med ackrediteringar och materialkontroller i början till de slutgiltiga utskrifterna av resultat i slutet. Där imellan löpande presentationer av resultat, Live streaming med grafik till TV, Youtube mm. mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Programmet är starkt förknippat med en arbetsgrupp känd som &amp;quot;i@nseo Team&amp;quot;, vilken med sin expertis i att organisera och köra tävlingar kan ses som den bästa i världen. Efter starten i slutet av 90-talet, utvecklades i@nseo till att 2006 bli det officiella tävlingsadministrations systemet i italien. Därefter har i@nseos skapare använt systemet till många olika typer av tävlingar i bågskytte världen. Olympiader, världsmästerskap, europamästerskap, Grand Prix turneringar, World Games, Universades, Universitetsmästerskap, WA festivaler och många fler, inklusive Run Archery tävlingar och Vegas Shoot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo teamet är det officiella resultat teamet för det italienska bågskytteförbundet, WA europa och på ett flertal WA tävlingar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: ett unikt namn ==&lt;br /&gt;
Akrynomet &amp;quot;i@nseo&amp;quot; består inte av initialerna i skaparnas namn utan är bokstäver ur de ursprungliga skaparnas namn, den så kallade ‘i@nseo Core Group’:&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039; = Ard&#039;&#039;&#039;i&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ardingo Scarzella)&lt;br /&gt;
 @&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;N&#039;&#039;&#039; = A&#039;&#039;&#039;n&#039;&#039;&#039;drea (Andrea Gabardi)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039; = Chri&#039;&#039;&#039;s&#039;&#039;&#039; (Christian Deligant)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;E&#039;&#039;&#039; = T&#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;o (Matteo Pisani)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039; = Marc&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039; (Marco Carpignano)&lt;br /&gt;
På senare tid har några nya medlemmar anslutit till teamet som support under större evenemang där noggrannhet, koordination och organisering är avgörande. Ett samlat team vars kunnande kan garantera ett bra resultat, erbjuds att hantera tävlingar över hela världen.&lt;br /&gt;
Den här manualen skapades ursprungligen för att ge alla en chans att sätta sig in i programmets alla funktioner för att öka antalet användare i världen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ORIS kompatibelt ==&lt;br /&gt;
ORIS (&#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039;lympic &#039;&#039;&#039;R&#039;&#039;&#039;esults and &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039;nformation &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039;ervices) definierar innehållet för sporternas resultatsystem, även bågskyttet. Du kan se det som ett sätt att skapa en enhetlig layout för publikationer. Allt för att förenkla för reportrar och media så att de lättare kan förstå sporten.&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo är ORIS kompatibelt, vilket innebär att publikationer i pdf format, där ikonen har de olympiska ringarna, är skapade på det sätt som stämmer överens med den Olympiska och Paralympiska layouten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Klubb, Land, Lag ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I i@nseo är klubb och land samma sak, skyttar som tävlar under samma &amp;quot;flagga&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
Om det är ett land så används IOC&#039;s landskod (3 bokstäver). Om det är en klubb så används klubbkoden som finns registrerad i IOL och resultatdatabasen. Systemen för klubbkoder kan variera från land till land. I i@nseo ser du genomgående användningen av termerna klubb och land vilkas användning är densamma.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ett Lag består vanligtvis av skyttar från samma klubb/land, men det finns möjlighet att specificera upp till 3 olika lag för en skytt, detta för att skytten ska kunna delta i ett lag för en annan klubb eller annat land. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Filter i i@nseo ==&lt;br /&gt;
I de olika sök- och text-fälten i i@nseo finns det möjlighet att använda specialtecken som fungerar som en &amp;quot;joker&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; (procenttecken): ersätter vilken sekvens av tecken som helst, även inget!&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; (understreck): ersätter alla tecken i den exakta positionen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Exempel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;%&amp;quot; ensamt i ett fält kommer att välja allt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RU%&amp;quot; kommer att välja alla &amp;quot;Recurve Under&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;_U21_&amp;quot; kommer att välja U21 klasserna, både män och kvinnor. Om en klass skulle haft två bokstäver så som LB tidigare L, så hade den inte valts med detta filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Klasser och finalklasser(events) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo delar upp alla deltagare i skjutstilar och klasser.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Skjutstil(division)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Skyttar&#039;&#039;: Det är vanligtvis bågtypen som anges här: Recurve, Compund, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Övriga&#039;&#039;: Det går även att lägga in icke tävlande i programmet och dela upp dem i olika grupperingar. Domare, funktionärer, klubb, press, media, Gäst m.fl.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Klass&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*** &#039;&#039;Skyttar&#039;&#039;: Åldersklass och klass. Skyttar tillhör en åldersklass men kan tillåtas att skjuta i en annan. Klasserna är vanligen uppdelade i Män eller kvinnor ex. U21M och U21W, men kan också vara könsneutrala som U21O och 21 klasserna.&lt;br /&gt;
*** &#039;&#039;Övriga&#039;&#039;: Här går det att ytterligare specificera exempelvis de olika funktionärerna. Resultat, kiosk, tavelvärd o.s.v.&lt;br /&gt;
Tänk på att &amp;quot;Övriga&amp;quot; inte ska ställas in som &amp;quot;skjutande&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En kombination av skjutstil och klass bildar en tävlingsklass: resultaten från en sådan kan skrivas under &amp;quot;Resultatlista per klass&amp;quot;. Lagresultaten du finner här bygger på att du har lag med 3 personer i samma klass, så det blandade lagen vi oftast kör med i Sverige kommer inte att presenteras här.&lt;br /&gt;
Lagresultat finner du istället under utskriften av kvalificeringsresultat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Events(final-klasser) är ett mycket användbart verktyg i i@nseo: Du kan skapa  finalklasser både för lag och individ, som kan innehålla en kombination av olika klasser. Ett exempel är finalklasserna på inomhus SM där 50, 60 och elitklassen slås ihop i en finalklass. 50M, 60M och M bildar en finalklass.&lt;br /&gt;
Det går även att skapa mixade klasser, både individuellt och i lag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utifrån de inställningar du gör för respektive finaklass så de antigen bara skjuta kvalificeringsrond eller fortsätta till finaler, eller olika typer av eliminerings-ronder, exempelvis Round Robin m.fl. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Innehåll}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tack till ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Medverkande&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Officiella sidor&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| Språk || Medverkande&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| [[File:Flag of Great Britain.svg|36px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| Engelska &lt;br /&gt;
| Andy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alessandra&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Översättningar&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Netherlands.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Nederländska&lt;br /&gt;
| Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of Italy.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Italienska&lt;br /&gt;
| Luca&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Paolo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of Sweden.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| Svenska&lt;br /&gt;
| Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Eskil&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:I@nseo]][[Category:Om oss]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/it&amp;diff=4526</id>
		<title>Ianseo/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/it&amp;diff=4526"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:19:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: cos&#039;è? ==&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo è un programma per gestire gare di tiro con l&#039;arco, creato come Open Source, grazie all&#039;iniziale supporto della Federazione Italiana di Tiro con l&#039;Arco ([https://fitarco.it Fitarco]). La Federazione ha poi promosso il programma per il suo utilizzo in Europa prima, e qualche mese dopo in tutto il mondo. Dopo la sua traduzione in oltre 30 lingue, i@nseo è diventato il programma più all&#039;avanguardia per gestire gare di tiro con l&#039;arco, l&#039;unico ad avere sempre integrato le regole World Archery (WA). E&#039; in continua e costante evoluzione, non solo per implementare le specifiche WA ma anche per mantenersi al passo con le richieste e i suggerimenti dei diversi utilizzatori, dalle Federazioni più blasonate all&#039;organizzatore di gare di club.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grazie a i@nseo, la gestione di una gara diventa facile, dalla A alla Z, dall&#039;accredito alle stampe, senza dimenticare le varie uscite TV, pubblicazioni online, eccetera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il software è strettamente legato al gruppo che lo ha creato, anche noto come &#039;&#039;i@nseo Team&#039;&#039;, che ha dimostrato sul campo di avere le migliori competenze al mondo in termini di gestione gara. Dopo le prime fasi di test risalenti alla fine del millennio scorso, i@nseo diventa il programma ufficiale di gestione gare della Fitarco nel 2006. Da allora, lo &#039;&#039;i@nseo Team&#039;&#039; ha gestito ogni sorta di evento al mondo: dalle Olimpiadi alle Coppe del mondo, dai Campionati europei alle Universiadi, dai Grand Prix ai Campionati del Mondo, dal Run Archery ai Vegas Shoot... e non è certo finita la lista!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo Team è anche la squadra risultati ufficiali della Federazione Italiana, di World Archery Europe e di molte gare di World Archery&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: una sigla particolare ==&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;acronimo &#039;&#039;i@nseo&#039;&#039; non deriva dalle iniziali dei creatori ma dalle lettere corrispondenti del logo:&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039; = Ard&#039;&#039;&#039;i&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ardingo Scarzella)&lt;br /&gt;
 @&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;N&#039;&#039;&#039; = A&#039;&#039;&#039;n&#039;&#039;&#039;drea (Andrea Gabardi)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039; = Chri&#039;&#039;&#039;s&#039;&#039;&#039; (Christian Deligant)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;E&#039;&#039;&#039; = T&#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;o (Matteo Pisani)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039; = Marc&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039; (Marco Carpignano)&lt;br /&gt;
Negli ultimi anni si sono aggiunti diversi elementi in supporto allo &#039;&#039;i@nseo Team&#039;&#039; per aiutarli ed affiancarli durante le gare maggiori, dove erano richieste accuratezza, coordinamento, organizzazione e complementarietà. Questo ha portato alla creazione di un gruppo risultati che è una garanzia ovunque nel mondo. Questa Wiki è stata concepita per venire in aiuto a chiunque voglia imparare a usare i@anseo al meglio, persino nelle sue più recondite pagine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stampe ORIS di default ==&lt;br /&gt;
ORIS (&#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039;lympic &#039;&#039;&#039;R&#039;&#039;&#039;esults and &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039;nformation &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039;ervices) definisce i contenuti dei sistemi di risultati per ciascuno sport, compreso il Tiro con l&#039;Arco. Si può vedere come un modo comune di presentare elenchi, classifiche, risultati, medaglieri, ecc. tra gli sport per facilitare ai giornalisti, ai media, ecc. la comprensione di cosa si tratta e identificare chi è chi, anche se non hanno una conoscenza completa dello sport.. Ianseo è conforme all&#039;ORIS: ciò significa che i risultati delle gare in formato ORIS (identificati da un&#039;icona PDF modificata con gli anelli olimpici) sono adattati con il layout Olimpico e Paralimpico.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Società, Paese, Squadra ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Ianseo, Società e Paese identificano la stessa cosa: un gruppo di persone che tirano sotto la stessa “bandiera”. Se si tratta di paesi veri e propri, Ianseo utilizza la convenzione del CIO che prevede un codice paese di 3 lettere. Le società possono avere un proprio codice o una propria sequenza di numeri, a seconda della federazione/organizzatore. In tutto Ianseo i termini Società e Paese sono intercambiabili.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Una squadra è SEMPRE formata da arcieri della stessa società. Per questo motivo ci sono fino a 3 società per ogni arciere, il che consente di tirare individualmente per una ma di far parte di una società diversa per le squadre. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Filtri in Ianseo ==&lt;br /&gt;
In tutti i filtri di testo di Ianseo si utilizza la stessa convenzione:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; (segno percentuale): significa qualsiasi sequenza di caratteri, anche nessuna!&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; (trattino basso): significa esattamente un carattere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Esempi ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; da solo in un campo selezionerà tutto&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;AR%&amp;quot; selezionerà tutti gli &amp;quot;Archi Ricurvi&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;__J_&amp;quot; selezionerà gli ARJM, ARJF, COJM, COJF, ANJM, ANJF&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Classi/Divisioni e Eventi ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ianseo divide tutti i partecipanti in Divisioni e Classi.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Divisione&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Arcieri&#039;&#039;: è solitamente il tipo di arco: Arco Ricurvo, Arco Compound, Arco Nudo, ecc.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Altri&#039;&#039;: di solito mostra l&#039;area di competenza: Giudice di Gara, Personale di Campo, Media, Ospite, ecc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Classe&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Arcieri&#039;&#039;: classe d&#039;età. Un arciere può appartenere a una classe di età e decidere di tirare in una classe differente, es gli Junior possono tirare come Senior.Le classi sono solitamente separate per sesso, es. JM e JF.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Altri&#039;&#039;: definisce il tipo di funzione all&#039;interno dell&#039;area di competenza: es Tecnico, Responsabile del Campo; Fotografo, TV per i Media; VIP, Capo delegazione per gli Ospiti; etc &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La combinazione di Divisione e Classe crea una Classe/Divisione di Tiro: i risultati saranno mostrati nelle cosiddette stampe “Classifiche di Classe”.&lt;br /&gt;
In questa classifica le squadre sono le classiche squadre di 3 persone della stessa Classe/Divisione e della stessa società/paese.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gli eventi sono lo strumento più potente di Ianseo: è possibile inserire una o più Classe/Divisione in classifica insieme in un unico evento, individuale o a squadre: per esempio, ci può essere un evento individuale che unisce tutti gli arcieri compound che tirano su bersagli di 80 cm a 50 m indipendentemente dall&#039;età e dal sesso, o un evento a squadre composto dal miglior Compound Maschile, dalla miglior Compound Femminile, e dai migliori 2 Archi Ricurvi Junior indipendentemente dal sesso. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In base al tipo di eliminazione e alle impostazioni, ciascun evento può terminare dopo la fase di qualificazione, o proseguire con delle griglie di scontri, o continuare con Gironi eliminatori, Gironi all&#039;Italiana, ecc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ringraziamenti ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Contributi&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Pagine ufficiali&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| Lingua || Autori&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| [[File:Flag of Great Britain.svg|36px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| Inglese&lt;br /&gt;
| Andy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alessandra&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Traduzioni&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Netherlands.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Olandese&lt;br /&gt;
| Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of Italy.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Italiano&lt;br /&gt;
| Luca&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Paolo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Sweden.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Svedese&lt;br /&gt;
| Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:I@nseo/it]][[Category:About us/it]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/fr&amp;diff=4525</id>
		<title>Ianseo/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Ianseo/fr&amp;diff=4525"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:19:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Proofreading}}&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: qu’est-ce que c’est ? ==&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo est un logiciel de gestion des résultats de compétitions de tir à l’arc, développé en tant que programme Open Source, grâce au soutien initial de la Fédération Italienne de Tir à l’Arc ([https://fitarco.it Fitarco]). La fédération italienne a ensuite encouragé son utilisation dans les pays européens, avant que, quelques mois plus tard, i@nseo ne soit adopté dans le monde entier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Traduit dans de nombreuses langues (plus de 30 à ce jour, bien que son interface utilisateur ait été conçue à l’origine en italien), i@nseo est devenu le logiciel le plus avancé au monde pour la gestion des compétitions de tir à l’arc. Il est le seul à intégrer l’ensemble des règles de la World Archery (WA).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
i@nseo évolue en permanence, non seulement pour répondre aux nouvelles exigences de la World Archery, mais aussi pour satisfaire les besoins de tous ses utilisateurs, depuis les plus importantes fédérations jusqu’aux organisateurs et utilisateurs individuels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grâce à i@nseo, la gestion d’une compétition de tir à l’arc est simplifiée du début à la fin, en commençant par les accréditations et en terminant par les documents imprimés, sans oublier l’affichage vidéo en direct des résultats (TV, réseau, YouTube, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le logiciel est également associé à un groupe de travail, connu sous le nom « i@nseo Team », qui dispose de la meilleure expertise au monde en matière d’organisation et de gestion de compétitions de tir à l’arc. Après une phase initiale de tests (à la fin des années 1990), i@nseo est devenu le logiciel officiel de gestion des compétitions en Italie en 2006. Depuis lors, ses créateurs l’ont utilisé pour gérer tous types d’événements dans le monde du tir à l’arc : Jeux Olympiques, Championnats du Monde, Championnats d’Europe, étapes de Grand Prix, Jeux Mondiaux, Universiades, Championnats Universitaires, Festivals de la World Archery, et bien d’autres encore, y compris des événements de Run Archery et The Vegas Shoot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;équipe i@nseo est également le gestionnaire officiel des résultats pour la Fédération Italienne de Tir à l’Arc, la World Archery Europe et plusieurs événements de la World Archery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== i@nseo: un nom unique ==&lt;br /&gt;
L’acronyme « i@nseo » ne provient pas des initiales de son groupe principal, mais de certaines lettres sélectionnées dans les noms de ses créateurs, le fameux « i@nseo Core Group » :&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039; = Ard&#039;&#039;&#039;i&#039;&#039;&#039; (Ardingo Scarzella)&lt;br /&gt;
 @&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;N&#039;&#039;&#039; = A&#039;&#039;&#039;n&#039;&#039;&#039;drea (Andrea Gabardi)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039; = Chri&#039;&#039;&#039;s&#039;&#039;&#039; (Christian Deligant)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;E&#039;&#039;&#039; = T&#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;o (Matteo Pisani)&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039; = Marc&#039;&#039;&#039;o&#039;&#039;&#039; (Marco Carpignano)&lt;br /&gt;
Ces dernières années, de nouveaux membres ont rejoint le groupe des créateurs afin de soutenir l’équipe principale, en les aidant lors de certains événements majeurs où précision, coordination et organisation sont nécessaires. Ils ont ainsi constitué une équipe dont les compétences en gestion et l’expertise organisationnelle sont proposées et reconnues dans le monde entier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce manuel a été conçu à l’origine pour permettre à chacun de découvrir le programme dans toutes ses fonctionnalités et d’en accroître le nombre d’utilisateurs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Conformité ORIS ==&lt;br /&gt;
ORIS (&#039;&#039;&#039;O&#039;&#039;&#039;lympic &#039;&#039;&#039;R&#039;&#039;&#039;esults and &#039;&#039;&#039;I&#039;&#039;&#039;nformation &#039;&#039;&#039;S&#039;&#039;&#039;ervices) définit le contenu des systèmes de résultats pour chaque sport, y compris le tir à l’arc. Il peut être considéré comme une méthode commune de présentation des listes, classements, résultats, médailles, etc., quel que soit le sport, afin de permettre aux journalistes, aux médias et aux autres intervenants de comprendre facilement les informations affichées, même sans connaissance approfondie de la discipline.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ianseo est conforme à la norme ORIS : cela signifie que les documents produits par la compétition au format ORIS (identifiés par une icône PDF modifiée portant les anneaux olympiques) sont adaptés à partir des mises en page utilisées pour les Jeux Olympiques et Paralympiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Club, Pays, Equipe ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans Ianseo, les termes Club et Pays désignent la même chose : un groupe de personnes tirant sous le même « drapeau ».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu’il s’agit de pays, Ianseo utilise la convention des codes pays à trois lettres du CIO (Comité International Olympique). Les clubs peuvent disposer de leur propre code ou d’une numérotation spécifique, selon la fédération ou l’organisateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans l’ensemble d’Ianseo, les termes Club et Pays sont utilisés de manière interchangeable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une équipe est TOUJOURS constituée d’archers appartenant au même club. C’est pourquoi il est possible d’associer jusqu’à trois clubs à chaque archer, lui permettant de tirer individuellement pour un club tout en faisant partie d’un autre club pour les épreuves par équipes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Filtres dans Ianseo ==&lt;br /&gt;
Dans tous les filtres textuels d’Ianseo, la même convention est utilisée :&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;%&#039;&#039;&#039; (percent sign): représente n’importe quelle séquence de caractères, y compris aucune.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;_&#039;&#039;&#039; (underscore): représente exactement un caractère.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;%&amp;quot; utilisé seul dans un champ sélectionnera tous les éléments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  « CL% » sélectionnera tous les éléments commençant par « CL », par exemple les catégories « Classiques »&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;__U%&amp;quot; sélectionnera tous les archers des catégories U11 à U21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Catégories et Épreuves ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ianseo répartit tous les participants en Divisions et Classes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Division&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Archers&#039;&#039;: il s’agit généralement du type d’arc : Arc Classique, Compound, Barebow, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Autre&#039;&#039;: indique généralement le domaine de fonction : Arbitre, Officiel, Média, Invité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Classe d&#039;âge&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Archers&#039;&#039;: classe d’âge. Un archer peut appartenir à une classe d’âge donnée et choisir de tirer dans une autre classe, par exemple un U21 tirant en catégorie Adulte. Les classes sont généralement séparées par sexe, par exemple U21H et U21F.&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Autre&#039;&#039;: définit le type de fonction au sein du domaine concerné : par exemple entraîneur ou chef d’équipe pour les Officiels ; photographe ou télévision pour les Médias ; VIP ou officiel de délégation pour les Invités ; etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une combinaison de Division et de Classe d’âge crée une catégorie de tir. Les résultats sont alors affichés dans les éditions appelées « Classes &amp;amp; Divisions ». Dans ces classements, les équipes correspondent aux équipes traditionnelles de trois archers appartenant à la même catégorie de tir et au même club/pays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les épreuves constituent l’outil le plus puissant d’Ianseo : une ou plusieurs catégories de tir peuvent être regroupées dans une même épreuve, individuelle ou par équipes. Par exemple, il peut y avoir une épreuve individuelle regroupant tous les archers en arc à poulies tirant à 50 m sur un blason de 80 cm, indépendamment de leur âge et de leur sexe ; ou une épreuve par équipes composée du meilleur homme en arc à poulies, de la meilleure femme en arc à poulies et des deux meilleurs archers U21 en arc classique, quel que soit leur sexe. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selon le type d’élimination et la configuration définie, chaque épreuve peut se terminer à l’issue du tir de qualification, ou se poursuivre par un tableau de matchs (brackets), des phases éliminatoires, des matchs de poules (round robin), etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Credits ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Contributions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Official Pages&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| Language || Contributors&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| [[File:Flag of Great Britain.svg|36px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| English &lt;br /&gt;
| Andy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alessandra&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Translations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Netherlands.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
| Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of Italy.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Italian&lt;br /&gt;
| Luca&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Paolo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of France.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| French&lt;br /&gt;
| Adrien&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alexandre&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fabien&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Guillaume&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Stéphane&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Sweden.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Swedish&lt;br /&gt;
| Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:I@nseo]][[Category:About us]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Ianseo/9/en&amp;diff=4523</id>
		<title>Translations:Ianseo/9/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:Ianseo/9/en&amp;diff=4523"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:19:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ Contributions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Official Pages&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;| Language || Contributors&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;6&amp;quot;| [[File:Flag of Great Britain.svg|36px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;6&amp;quot;| English &lt;br /&gt;
| Andy&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alessandra&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rob&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Translations&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Netherlands.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Dutch&lt;br /&gt;
| Gerrit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of Italy.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;| Italian&lt;br /&gt;
| Luca&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Christian&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Paolo&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;|[[File:Flag of France.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|rowspan=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;| French&lt;br /&gt;
| Adrien&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Alexandre&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fabien&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Guillaume&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Stéphane&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Flag of Sweden.svg|36px]]&lt;br /&gt;
| Swedish&lt;br /&gt;
| Ken&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=ISK/fr&amp;diff=4522</id>
		<title>ISK/fr</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=ISK/fr&amp;diff=4522"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== ISK (Scorekeeper NG) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette option de menu est disponible lors de l&#039;utilisation de l&#039;application Scorekeeper NG et donne accès aux fonctions qui lui sont spécifiquement dédiées. Ces fonctions permettent de configurer et de contrôler l&#039;application, tout en fournissant des informations sur l&#039;état des applications pendant leur utilisation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il existe trois modes de fonctionnement de l&#039;application : Lite, Pro et Live. Certaines des options affichées dans ce menu ne sont pertinentes que pour certains modes et ne seront pas affichées dans les autres modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lite&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to use the app with i@nseo and score points directly at the target; it supports basic scoring functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Pro&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; activates more advanced features in both the app and i@nseo, is focused on professional competitions, and allows you to configure the devices directly from Ianseo and see real-time status of each device and archer when scoring. Any competition can be Lite, but Pro competitions require a license key that can be obtained from ianseo.net.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Live&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is similar to Pro and is also used for professional competitions, but is for very advanced users that require more precise control of the scoring devices. Live requires the use of an extra module to provide fast two-way communication with the devices as well as special licensing requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gestion des appareils (Pro et Live uniquement) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette option affiche la fonction de gestion des appareils, qui permet de voir quels appareils sont connectés à i@nseo, leur dernier état connu, ainsi que les fonctions permettant de modifier leur configuration. Un exemple de cet écran est présenté ci-dessous.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The devices can be assigned to targets by clicking on the target number and entering a new one, and also a new group can be assigned as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The cloud under the &#039;Reload configuration&#039; is green when the device has confirmed receipt of the configuration, if it is grey then the device has not confirmed it has received the current configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISK-DeviceManagement.png|none|thumb|1000x250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Résultats (Pro et Live uniquement) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Cette option affiche la fonction Résultats, qui permet de voir les appareils actuellement connectés ainsi que l&#039;état actuel de la remontée des résultats depuis ces appareils. Chaque cible est affichée séparément, avec des cases individuelles pour chaque archer. À mesure que les archers saisissent leurs flèches, la couleur du titre et des cases change automatiquement. Une légende indiquant les couleurs et leur signification est affichée sous la liste des cibles. En cliquant sur l&#039;icône « i » (information), une liste des archers présents sur la cible s&#039;affiche ; pendant la saisie des scores, les valeurs des flèches sont affichées à côté de chaque archer. Les valeurs des flèches peuvent être supprimées ou importées en cliquant sur les boutons correspondants.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois que les archers ont terminé la saisie des scores, les cases doivent être de couleur jaunâtre. Cela signifie que les flèches sont enregistrées dans une table temporaire et non dans la table officielle des résultats. Chaque cible peut être importée manuellement, si souhaité, ou toutes les cibles peuvent être importées en même temps en cliquant sur le bouton « Import ». Cette procédure manuelle peut être supprimée en cochant la case « Auto Import ». Il est également possible d&#039;importer automatiquement toute une catégorie d&#039;archers lorsque la dernière flèche de cette catégorie a été saisie pour la volée en cours, en cochant la case « Auto Import Partials ». Lorsque toutes les cibles ont terminé la saisie des scores et que les résultats ont été importés, vous pouvez passer à la volée suivante en modifiant la valeur du champ de volée. L&#039;état de la saisie des scores pour cette volée sera alors affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The frame around each device is red or green depending on the status of the application being connected (not the device, as the device may be on, but the app not open or running)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Remarque :&#039;&#039;&#039; l&#039;application Scorekeeper NG dispose d&#039;un cache hors ligne permettant d&#039;enregistrer les valeurs des flèches si la connexion Wi-Fi/réseau est interrompue. Si cela se produit, l&#039;icône d&#039;état de la connexion dans l&#039;application devient rouge. Toutes les flèches saisies pendant que l&#039;appareil est hors ligne sont enregistrées localement sur celui-ci. Une fois la connexion rétablie, les valeurs des flèches mises en cache sont envoyées à Ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISK-Results.png|none|thumb|1000x273px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Field Monitor (Pro &amp;amp; Live only)===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This option can be used in conjunction with the Results page to monitor the progress of scoring. It shows similar information regarding scoring and colors with the main difference being that targets that have finished scoring are removed from the screen so only targets that are still scoring arrows are shown. This is useful for field crew to provide an overview of the field and monitor which targets are still actively scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISK-FieldMonitor.png|none|thumb|1000x217px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Info (Live only)===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to specify the device (or range of devices) that you want to interrogate. After entering the target numbers separate by commas, or a &#039; - &#039; for a range i.e. 1-10, select Ok and then the device will populate. If they are online you will be able to expand the device details and see things such as IP address / wifi info etc, and then on the right side of the screen you can interrogate the stored scorecard on the device to check the athletes present and the arrow values, scores and other settings stored per athlete, per scorecard.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Print QR Configuration Codes===&lt;br /&gt;
This option will generate the QR code necessary to configure the Scorekeeper NG app which will allow it to connect to the i@nseo computer. Before this can be used, the Scorekeeper app will need to be activated in the main Competition Information and the appropriate parameters entered. When the option is chosen, a pdf page will be generated containing the competition information and the QR code needed by the app. Scanning this QR code in the app should properly configure the app and it should connect to the i@nseo computer.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISKProSetup.png|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Print Target Scoring QRCode Sheet ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to print the QR codes to configure the Scorekeeper NG app with the requested targets to score for a specific Session, Target, and Distance with using the Lite mode. This will generate the same QR codes that can be found on the scorecards.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Get QRCode Data (Live only)===&lt;br /&gt;
Using this screen allows you to scan the devices generated QR code (on the device go to settings &amp;gt; Qr Codes &amp;gt; Scorecard - Generate ) and then you can scan back the devices data if you have lost network connectivity, or have no internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Manage Locked Sessions (Lite only)===&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen it is possible to prevent devices from scoring in particular distances or sessions which allows you to manage the integrity of result. You can also generate a report using the PDF icons for those sessions/distances to show how many people have scored the correct number of arrows to allow you to keep track of the progress.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lockedsessions.png|center|frameless|906x906px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rank Calculation Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RnkReCalc.png|center|frameless|1006x1006px]]&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen it is possible to manage the way the ranking is re-calculated as scores are imported. It is also possible to forcibly import scores from the temporary state, which is similar to using the import function on the results screen in Pro/Live&lt;br /&gt;
Extra care needs to be taken to ensure you understand the implication of changing the import method vs what is displayed outwardly on things like PDFs or live updates to the internet if the settings are changed. (i.e. changing to recalculate at the end of a distance means the positions wont change during the distance but any intermediate updates would show new scores, and not a changed order of the athletes)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Device Grouping===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In some competitions it may be that athletes have not turned up to shoot, and therefore leave one person on a buttress. In these cases you can turn on device grouping, and either select a grouping for a few targets, or all targets in grouping mode so you can modify during the event if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can create bulk groups using the option at the bottom, specify how many in a group and the target range needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to edit a group, select the pencil to the left and you can the targets in the group, and click the save icon, or you may delete the group completely with the little dustbin icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{Note|type=warn|text=After changing, adding or removing targets to groups you will need to go to the device management and resend the configuration for the target(s) in question, or the whole field depending what you have done}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DevGroup.png|center|frameless|890x890px]]&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Scorecard Management===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an extra module made available on demand.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=ISK/it&amp;diff=4521</id>
		<title>ISK/it</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=ISK/it&amp;diff=4521"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== ISK (Scorekeeper NG) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Questa opzione di menu è disponibile quando si utilizza l&#039;applicazione Scorekeeper NG e consente di accedere a funzioni specifiche per l&#039;app. Queste funzioni aiutano a configurare e controllare l&#039;app e allo stesso tempo forniscono informazioni sullo stato dell&#039;app durante l&#039;uso.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;app può essere utilizzata in tre modalità -- Lite, Pro e Live. Alcune delle opzioni visualizzate in questo menu sono rilevanti solo per alcune modalità e non vengono visualizzate per altre.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lite&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to use the app with i@nseo and score points directly at the target; it supports basic scoring functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Pro&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; activates more advanced features in both the app and i@nseo, is focused on professional competitions, and allows you to configure the devices directly from Ianseo and see real-time status of each device and archer when scoring. Any competition can be Lite, but Pro competitions require a license key that can be obtained from ianseo.net.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Live&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is similar to Pro and is also used for professional competitions, but is for very advanced users that require more precise control of the scoring devices. Live requires the use of an extra module to provide fast two-way communication with the devices as well as special licensing requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gestione Dispositivi (solo Pro &amp;amp; Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Questa opzione mostra la funzione Gestione dispositivi che consente di vedere quali dispositivi sono collegati a i@nseo, il loro ultimo contatto noto e le funzioni per modificare la configurazione dei dispositivi. Di seguito è riportato un esempio di questa schermata.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The devices can be assigned to targets by clicking on the target number and entering a new one, and also a new group can be assigned as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The cloud under the &#039;Reload configuration&#039; is green when the device has confirmed receipt of the configuration, if it is grey then the device has not confirmed it has received the current configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISK-DeviceManagement.png|none|thumb|1000x250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Risultati (solo Pro &amp;amp; Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Questa opzione mostra la funzione Risultati, la quale permette di vedere i dispositivi attualmente collegati e lo stato attuale dei risultati riportati da parte dei singoli dispositivi. Ogni piazzola viene mostrata separatamente con i singoli riquadri per ogni arciere. Man mano che gli arcieri segnano le frecce, il colore del titolo e delle caselle cambia automaticamente. Sotto l&#039;elenco delle piazzole è riportata una legenda che mostra i colori e il loro significato. Cliccando sull&#039;icona &amp;quot;i&amp;quot; (info), si otterrà la lista degli arcieri della piazzola; durante l&#039;inserimento dei punti, verranno visualizzati accanto a ciascun arciere i valori delle singole frecce inserite. I valori delle frecce&lt;br /&gt;
possono essere rimossi o importati cliccando sui pulsanti.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Una volta che gli arcieri avranno finito di segnare i punti, le caselle dovrebbero essere di colore giallo. Ciò significa che le frecce si trovano in una tabella temporanea e non nella tabella dei risultati ufficiali. Ogni singola piazzola può essere importata manualmente, se lo si desidera, oppure tutte le piazzole possono essere importate simultaneamente cliccando sul pulsante &#039;&#039;&#039;Importa&#039;&#039;&#039;. Questo processo manuale può essere eliminato selezionando la casella di controllo per l&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Autoimporta&#039;&#039;&#039;. Selezionando la casella di controllo &#039;&#039;&#039;Auto importazione parziale&#039;&#039;&#039;, è anche possibile importare automaticamente un&#039;intera Divisione/Classe di arcieri solo dopo che l&#039;ultima freccia di quella Divisione/Classe è stata inserita nella volèe.&lt;br /&gt;
Solo dopo che tutte le piazzole avranno terminato l&#039;inserimento dei punteggi e le frecce saranno state importate, sarà possibile passare alla volèe successiva cambiando il valore nel campo &#039;&#039;&#039;Volée&#039;&#039;&#039;. In questo modo si visualizzerà lo stato dell&#039;inserimento punti per quella volèe.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The frame around each device is red or green depending on the status of the application being connected (not the device, as the device may be on, but the app not open or running)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Nota:&#039;&#039; L&#039;app Ianseo Scorekeeper NG dispone di una cache offline per salvare i valori delle frecce se la connessione Wi-Fi/rete&lt;br /&gt;
dovesse essere interrotta. In tal caso, l&#039;icona dello stato di connessione nell&#039;app diventerà rossa. Ciascuna freccia inserita mentre il dispositivo è offline sarà salvata localmente nel dispositivo. Una volta ripristinata la connessione di rete, i valori delle frecce memorizzati nella cache verranno inviati a Ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Memo|immagine - ISK Risultati}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Field Monitor (Pro &amp;amp; Live only)===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monitor di campo (solo Pro &amp;amp; Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Info Terminali (solo Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stampa il QR-Code per l&#039;installazione ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Print Target Scoring QRCode Sheet ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to print the QR codes to configure the Scorekeeper NG app with the requested targets to score for a specific Session, Target, and Distance with using the Lite mode. This will generate the same QR codes that can be found on the scorecards.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leggi dati dal QR-Code (solo Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gestisci le sessioni bloccate (solo Lite) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Impostazioni di calcolo della classifica ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Raggruppamento dispositivi ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In some competitions it may be that athletes have not turned up to shoot, and therefore leave one person on a buttress. In these cases you can turn on device grouping, and either select a grouping for a few targets, or all targets in grouping mode so you can modify during the event if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can create bulk groups using the option at the bottom, specify how many in a group and the target range needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to edit a group, select the pencil to the left and you can the targets in the group, and click the save icon, or you may delete the group completely with the little dustbin icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{Note|type=warn|text=After changing, adding or removing targets to groups you will need to go to the device management and resend the configuration for the target(s) in question, or the whole field depending what you have done}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DevGroup.png|center|frameless|890x890px]]&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gestione degli Score ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=ISK/en&amp;diff=4520</id>
		<title>ISK/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=ISK/en&amp;diff=4520"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== ISK (Scorekeeper NG) ==&lt;br /&gt;
This menu option is available when using the Scorekeeper NG app and provides access to functions that work specifically with the app. These functions help you configure and control the app as well as providing information regarding the status of the apps while in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three modes of operation using the app -- &#039;&#039;Lite&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Pro&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;Live&#039;&#039;. Some of the options shown in this menu are only relevant for certain modes and will not be shown for other modes.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lite&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to use the app with i@nseo and score points directly at the target; it supports basic scoring functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Pro&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; activates more advanced features in both the app and i@nseo, is focused on professional competitions, and allows you to configure the devices directly from Ianseo and see real-time status of each device and archer when scoring. Any competition can be Lite, but Pro competitions require a license key that can be obtained from ianseo.net.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Live&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is similar to Pro and is also used for professional competitions, but is for very advanced users that require more precise control of the scoring devices. Live requires the use of an extra module to provide fast two-way communication with the devices as well as special licensing requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Device Management (Pro &amp;amp; Live only)===&lt;br /&gt;
This option displays the Device Management function which allows you to see which devices are connected to i@nseo, their last known status, and functions to change the configuration of the devices. An example of this screen is shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The devices can be assigned to targets by clicking on the target number and entering a new one, and also a new group can be assigned as well. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The cloud under the &#039;Reload configuration&#039; is green when the device has confirmed receipt of the configuration, if it is grey then the device has not confirmed it has received the current configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISK-DeviceManagement.png|none|thumb|1000x250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Results (Pro &amp;amp; Live only)===&lt;br /&gt;
This option displays the Results function which allows you see the currently connected devices and the current status of the results reporting from the devices. Each target is shown separately with the individual squares for each archer. As the archers score the arrows, the color of the title and squares will change automatically. A legend showing the colors and their meanings is shown below the target list. Clicking on the &amp;quot;i&amp;quot; (info) icon will bring up a list of the archers on the target; during scoring, the arrow values will be shown next to each archer. The arrows values can be Removed or Imported by clicking on the buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the archers have finished scoring, the squares should be yellowish in color. This means the arrows are in a temporary table and not in the official results table. Each individual target can be imported manually, if desired, or all targets can be imported at the same type by clicking the Import button. This manual process can be eliminated by checking the box for the Auto Import checkbox. It is also possible to automatically import an entire class of archers when the last arrow for that class has been entered for the end by checking the Auto Import Partials checkbox. When all the targets have finished scoring and the results imported, you can move to the next end by changing the value in the end field. This will display the scoring status for that end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The frame around each device is red or green depending on the status of the application being connected (not the device, as the device may be on, but the app not open or running) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scorekeeper NG app has an offline cache to save arrow values if the WiFi/network connection should be interrupted. If this happens, the connection status icon in the app will change to red. Any arrows entered while offline will be saved locally in the device. Once the connection is restored, the cached arrow values will be sent to Ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISK-Results.png|none|thumb|1000x273px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Field Monitor (Pro &amp;amp; Live only)=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option can be used in conjunction with the Results page to monitor the progress of scoring. It shows similar information regarding scoring and colors with the main difference being that targets that have finished scoring are removed from the screen so only targets that are still scoring arrows are shown. This is useful for field crew to provide an overview of the field and monitor which targets are still actively scoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISK-FieldMonitor.png|none|thumb|1000x217px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get Info (Live only)===&lt;br /&gt;
This function allows you to specify the device (or range of devices) that you want to interrogate. After entering the target numbers separate by commas, or a &#039; - &#039; for a range i.e. 1-10, select Ok and then the device will populate. If they are online you will be able to expand the device details and see things such as IP address / wifi info etc, and then on the right side of the screen you can interrogate the stored scorecard on the device to check the athletes present and the arrow values, scores and other settings stored per athlete, per scorecard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Print QR Configuration Codes===&lt;br /&gt;
This option will generate the QR code necessary to configure the Scorekeeper NG app which will allow it to connect to the i@nseo computer. Before this can be used, the Scorekeeper app will need to be activated in the main Competition Information and the appropriate parameters entered. When the option is chosen, a pdf page will be generated containing the competition information and the QR code needed by the app. Scanning this QR code in the app should properly configure the app and it should connect to the i@nseo computer.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISKProSetup.png|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Print Target Scoring QRCode Sheet ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to print the QR codes to configure the Scorekeeper NG app with the requested targets to score for a specific Session, Target, and Distance with using the Lite mode. This will generate the same QR codes that can be found on the scorecards.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Get QRCode Data (Live only)===&lt;br /&gt;
Using this screen allows you to scan the devices generated QR code (on the device go to settings &amp;gt; Qr Codes &amp;gt; Scorecard - Generate ) and then you can scan back the devices data if you have lost network connectivity, or have no internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manage Locked Sessions (Lite only)===&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen it is possible to prevent devices from scoring in particular distances or sessions which allows you to manage the integrity of result. You can also generate a report using the PDF icons for those sessions/distances to show how many people have scored the correct number of arrows to allow you to keep track of the progress.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lockedsessions.png|center|frameless|906x906px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rank Calculation Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RnkReCalc.png|center|frameless|1006x1006px]]&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen it is possible to manage the way the ranking is re-calculated as scores are imported. It is also possible to forcibly import scores from the temporary state, which is similar to using the import function on the results screen in Pro/Live&lt;br /&gt;
Extra care needs to be taken to ensure you understand the implication of changing the import method vs what is displayed outwardly on things like PDFs or live updates to the internet if the settings are changed. (i.e. changing to recalculate at the end of a distance means the positions wont change during the distance but any intermediate updates would show new scores, and not a changed order of the athletes) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Device Grouping===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some competitions it may be that athletes have not turned up to shoot, and therefore leave one person on a buttress. In these cases you can turn on device grouping, and either select a grouping for a few targets, or all targets in grouping mode so you can modify during the event if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create bulk groups using the option at the bottom, specify how many in a group and the target range needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to edit a group, select the pencil to the left and you can the targets in the group, and click the save icon, or you may delete the group completely with the little dustbin icon. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{Note|type=warn|text=After changing, adding or removing targets to groups you will need to go to the device management and resend the configuration for the target(s) in question, or the whole field depending what you have done}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DevGroup.png|center|frameless|890x890px]]&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Scorecard Management===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an extra module made available on demand. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=ISK/sv&amp;diff=4519</id>
		<title>ISK/sv</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=ISK/sv&amp;diff=4519"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Updating to match new version of source page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Ianseo ScoreKepper (Scorekeeper NG) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Detta menyalternativ är tillgängligt när appen Scorekeeper NG används och ger åtkomst till funktioner som är särskilt avsedda för appen. Dessa funktioner hjälper dig att konfigurera och styra appen samt ger information om apparnas status medan de används.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Det finns tre driftlägen när appen används – Lite, Pro och Live. Vissa alternativ som visas i denna meny är bara relevanta för vissa lägen och visas därför inte i andra lägen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lite&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; allows you to use the app with i@nseo and score points directly at the target; it supports basic scoring functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Pro&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; activates more advanced features in both the app and i@nseo, is focused on professional competitions, and allows you to configure the devices directly from Ianseo and see real-time status of each device and archer when scoring. Any competition can be Lite, but Pro competitions require a license key that can be obtained from ianseo.net.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Live&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; is similar to Pro and is also used for professional competitions, but is for very advanced users that require more precise control of the scoring devices. Live requires the use of an extra module to provide fast two-way communication with the devices as well as special licensing requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hantera enheter (endast Pro &amp;amp; Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Detta alternativ visar funktionen för enhetshantering, där du kan se vilka enheter som är anslutna till i@nseo, deras senast kända status samt funktioner för att ändra enheternas konfiguration. Ett exempel på denna skärm visas nedan.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The devices can be assigned to targets by clicking on the target number and entering a new one, and also a new group can be assigned as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The cloud under the &#039;Reload configuration&#039; is green when the device has confirmed receipt of the configuration, if it is grey then the device has not confirmed it has received the current configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ISK-DeviceManagement.png|none|thumb|1000x250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Resultat (endast Pro &amp;amp; Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Detta alternativ visar funktionen för resultat, där du kan se de enheter som för närvarande är anslutna samt aktuell status för resultaten som rapporteras från enheterna. Varje tavla visas separat med individuella rutor för varje skytt. När skyttarna registrerar sina pilar ändras färgen på rubriken och rutorna automatiskt. En förklaring som visar färgerna och deras betydelser visas under tavellistan. Om du klickar på ikonen &amp;quot;i&amp;quot; (info) visas en lista över skyttarna på tavlan; under poängregistreringen visas pilvärdena bredvid varje skytt. Pilvärdena kan tas bort eller importeras genom att klicka på knapparna.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
När skyttarna har avslutat poängregistreringen bör rutorna vara gulaktiga. Det betyder att pilarna finns i en tillfällig tabell och inte i den officiella resultattabellen. Varje enskild tavla kan importeras manuellt om så önskas, eller så kan alla tavlor importeras samtidigt genom att klicka på knappen Import.&lt;br /&gt;
Denna manuella process kan elimineras genom att markera kryssrutan för Auto Import. Det är också möjligt att automatiskt importera en hel klass skyttar när den sista pilen för den klassen har registrerats för serien, genom att markera kryssrutan Auto-Import klassvis.&lt;br /&gt;
När alla tavlor har avslutat poängregistreringen och resultaten har importerats kan du gå vidare till nästa serie genom att ändra värdet i seriefältet. Då visas poängregistreringsstatus för den serien.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The frame around each device is red or green depending on the status of the application being connected (not the device, as the device may be on, but the app not open or running)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Obs:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scorekeeper NG-appen har en offlinecache för att spara pilvärden om WiFi-/nätverksanslutningen skulle avbrytas. Om detta händer ändras ikonen för anslutningsstatus i appen till röd. Pilar som registreras medan appen är offline sparas lokalt på enheten. När anslutningen återställs skickas de cachelagrade pilvärdena till Ianseo.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Memo|image - ISK Results}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Field Monitor (Pro &amp;amp; Live only)===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fältövervakning (endast Pro &amp;amp; Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hämta info (endast Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Skriv ut QR-konfigurationskoder ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Print Target Scoring QRCode Sheet ===&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to print the QR codes to configure the Scorekeeper NG app with the requested targets to score for a specific Session, Target, and Distance with using the Lite mode. This will generate the same QR codes that can be found on the scorecards.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Läs in QR-koddata (endast Live) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hantera låsta omgångar (endast Lite) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rankinginställningar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Gruppera tavlor(enheter) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In some competitions it may be that athletes have not turned up to shoot, and therefore leave one person on a buttress. In these cases you can turn on device grouping, and either select a grouping for a few targets, or all targets in grouping mode so you can modify during the event if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can create bulk groups using the option at the bottom, specify how many in a group and the target range needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to edit a group, select the pencil to the left and you can the targets in the group, and click the save icon, or you may delete the group completely with the little dustbin icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{Note|type=warn|text=After changing, adding or removing targets to groups you will need to go to the device management and resend the configuration for the target(s) in question, or the whole field depending what you have done}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DevGroup.png|center|frameless|890x890px]]&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scanna skjutkort(streckkoder) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Innehåll}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;en&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Content}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/31/en&amp;diff=4518</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/31/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/31/en&amp;diff=4518"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Content}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/19/en&amp;diff=4517</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/19/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/19/en&amp;diff=4517"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This is an extra module made available on demand.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/18/en&amp;diff=4516</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/18/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/18/en&amp;diff=4516"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Scorecard Management===&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/30/en&amp;diff=4515</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/30/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/30/en&amp;diff=4515"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:DevGroup.png|center|frameless|890x890px]]&lt;br /&gt;
---&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/29/en&amp;diff=4514</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/29/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/29/en&amp;diff=4514"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{Note|type=warn|text=After changing, adding or removing targets to groups you will need to go to the device management and resend the configuration for the target(s) in question, or the whole field depending what you have done}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/28/en&amp;diff=4513</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/28/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/28/en&amp;diff=4513"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you need to edit a group, select the pencil to the left and you can the targets in the group, and click the save icon, or you may delete the group completely with the little dustbin icon.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/27/en&amp;diff=4512</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/27/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/27/en&amp;diff=4512"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;You can create bulk groups using the option at the bottom, specify how many in a group and the target range needed.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/26/en&amp;diff=4511</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/26/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/26/en&amp;diff=4511"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In some competitions it may be that athletes have not turned up to shoot, and therefore leave one person on a buttress. In these cases you can turn on device grouping, and either select a grouping for a few targets, or all targets in grouping mode so you can modify during the event if needed.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/16/en&amp;diff=4510</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/16/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/16/en&amp;diff=4510"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=== Device Grouping===&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/15/en&amp;diff=4509</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/15/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/15/en&amp;diff=4509"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=== Rank Calculation Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RnkReCalc.png|center|frameless|1006x1006px]]&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen it is possible to manage the way the ranking is re-calculated as scores are imported. It is also possible to forcibly import scores from the temporary state, which is similar to using the import function on the results screen in Pro/Live&lt;br /&gt;
Extra care needs to be taken to ensure you understand the implication of changing the import method vs what is displayed outwardly on things like PDFs or live updates to the internet if the settings are changed. (i.e. changing to recalculate at the end of a distance means the positions wont change during the distance but any intermediate updates would show new scores, and not a changed order of the athletes)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/14/en&amp;diff=4508</id>
		<title>Translations:ISK/14/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.ianseo.net/index.php?title=Translations:ISK/14/en&amp;diff=4508"/>
		<updated>2026-07-13T06:18:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;FuzzyBot: Importing a new version from external source&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Manage Locked Sessions (Lite only)===&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen it is possible to prevent devices from scoring in particular distances or sessions which allows you to manage the integrity of result. You can also generate a report using the PDF icons for those sessions/distances to show how many people have scored the correct number of arrows to allow you to keep track of the progress.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Lockedsessions.png|center|frameless|906x906px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>FuzzyBot</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>